path: root/zh_TW.UTF-8/books/fdp-primer/book.xml

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//FreeBSD//DTD DocBook XML V5.0-Based Extension//EN" "http://www.FreeBSD.org/XML/share/xml/freebsd50.dtd" [
<!ENTITY % chapters SYSTEM "chapters.ent">
<!--
     Creates entities for each chapter in the Documentation Project Primer.
     Each entity is named chap.foo, where foo is the value of the id
     attribute on that chapter, and corresponds to the name of the
      directory in which that chapter's .xml file is stored.

     Chapters should be listed in the order in which they are referenced.

     $FreeBSD$
--><!ENTITY chap.overview SYSTEM "overview/chapter.xml">
<!ENTITY chap.tools SYSTEM "tools/chapter.xml">
<!ENTITY chap.working-copy SYSTEM "working-copy/chapter.xml">
<!ENTITY chap.structure SYSTEM "structure/chapter.xml">
<!ENTITY chap.doc-build SYSTEM "doc-build/chapter.xml">
<!ENTITY chap.the-website SYSTEM "the-website/chapter.xml">
<!ENTITY chap.xml-primer SYSTEM "xml-primer/chapter.xml">
<!ENTITY chap.xhtml-markup SYSTEM "xhtml-markup/chapter.xml">
<!ENTITY chap.docbook-markup SYSTEM "docbook-markup/chapter.xml">
<!ENTITY chap.stylesheets SYSTEM "stylesheets/chapter.xml">
<!ENTITY chap.translations SYSTEM "translations/chapter.xml">
<!ENTITY chap.po-translations SYSTEM "po-translations/chapter.xml">
<!ENTITY chap.writing-style SYSTEM "writing-style/chapter.xml">
<!ENTITY chap.editor-config SYSTEM "editor-config/chapter.xml">
<!ENTITY chap.see-also SYSTEM "see-also/chapter.xml">
<!ENTITY app.examples SYSTEM "examples/appendix.xml">
<!-- ENTITY index SYSTEM "index.xml" -->]>
<!-- Copyright (c) 1998, 1999 Nik Clayton, All rights reserved.

     Redistribution and use in source (SGML DocBook) and 'compiled' forms
     (SGML, HTML, PDF, PostScript, RTF and so forth) with or without
     modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
     are met:

      1. Redistributions of source code (SGML DocBook) must retain the above
         copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
         disclaimer as the first lines of this file unmodified.

      2. Redistributions in compiled form (transformed to other DTDs,
         converted to PDF, PostScript, RTF and other formats) must reproduce
         the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
         following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
         provided with the distribution.

     THIS DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED BY NIK CLAYTON "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR
     IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
     OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
     DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL NIK CLAYTON BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
     INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
     (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
     SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
     HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
     STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
     ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
     POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

     $FreeBSD$
-->
<book xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW">
  <info><title>FreeBSD 文件計畫入門書</title>
    

    <author><orgname>FreeBSD 文件計劃</orgname></author>

    <copyright><year>1998</year> <year>1999</year> <year>2000</year> <year>2001</year> <year>2002</year> <year>2003</year> <year>2004</year> <year>2005</year> <year>2006</year> <year>2007</year> <year>2008</year> <year>2009</year> <year>2010</year> <year>2011</year> <year>2012</year> <year>2013</year> <year>2014</year> <holder role="mailto:doceng@FreeBSD.org">DocEng</holder></copyright>

    <pubdate role="rcs">$FreeBSD$</pubdate>

    <releaseinfo>$FreeBSD$</releaseinfo>

    
<legalnotice xml:id="legalnotice">
  <title>版權</title>

  <para xml:lang="en">Redistribution and use in source (XML DocBook) and 'compiled'
    forms (XML, HTML, PDF, PostScript, RTF and so forth) with or without
    modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
    met:</para>

  <orderedlist>
    <listitem>
      <para xml:lang="en">Redistributions of source code (XML DocBook) must retain the
        above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
        disclaimer as the first lines of this file unmodified.</para>
    </listitem>

    <listitem>
      <para xml:lang="en">Redistributions in compiled form (transformed to other DTDs,
        converted to PDF, PostScript, RTF and other formats) must
        reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
        the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
        materials provided with the distribution.</para>
    </listitem>
  </orderedlist>

  <important>
    <para xml:lang="en">THIS DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED BY THE FREEBSD DOCUMENTATION
      PROJECT "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
      BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
      FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
      THE FREEBSD DOCUMENTATION PROJECT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
      INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
      BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
      OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
      ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
      TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE
      USE OF THIS DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
      DAMAGE.</para>
  </important>
</legalnotice>


    <abstract>
      <para>感謝您參與 FreeBSD 文件計劃，您的點滴貢獻，都相當寶貴。</para>

      <para>本入手書內容包括：如何開始著手貢獻FreeBSD 文件計劃 (簡稱： <acronym>FDP</acronym> )的各項細節，以及會用到的一些工具、軟體 ，以及文件計畫的宗旨。</para>

      <para>本入門書仍在持續撰寫中。任何修正或新增內容的建議都非常歡迎。</para>
    </abstract>
  </info>

  <preface xml:id="preface">
    <title>序</title>

    <sect1 xml:id="preface-prompts">
      <title>Shell 提示符號(Prompts)</title>

      <para>下表顯示出一般使用者帳號與 root 的提示符號，在所有的文件例子中會用提示符號(prompt) ，來提醒您該用哪種帳號才對。</para>

      <informaltable frame="none" pgwide="1">
	<tgroup cols="2">
	  <thead>
	    <row>
	      <entry>帳號</entry>
	      <entry>提示符號</entry>
	    </row>
	  </thead>

	  <tbody>
	    <row>
	      <entry>一般使用者</entry>
	      <entry><prompt>%</prompt></entry>
	    </row>

	    <row>
	      <entry><systemitem class="username">root</systemitem></entry>
	      <entry><prompt>#</prompt></entry>
	    </row>
	  </tbody>
	</tgroup>
      </informaltable>
    </sect1>

    <sect1 xml:id="preface-conventions">
      <title>書中所用的編排風格</title>

      <para>下表為本書中所使用編排風格方式</para>

      <informaltable frame="none" pgwide="1">
	<tgroup cols="2">
	  <thead>
	    <row>
	      <entry>代表意義</entry>
	      <entry>舉例</entry>
	    </row>
	  </thead>

	  <tbody>
	    <row>
	      <entry>指令</entry>
	      <entry>使用 <command>ls -l</command> 來列出所有的檔案。</entry>
	    </row>

	    <row>
	      <entry>檔名</entry>
	      <entry>編輯 <filename>.login</filename> 。</entry>
	    </row>

	    <row>
	      <entry>螢幕上會出現的訊息</entry>
	      <entry><screen>You have mail.</screen></entry>
	    </row>

	    <row>
	      <entry>輸入指令後，螢幕上會出現的對應內容。</entry>

	      <entry><screen><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>date +"The time is %H:%M"</userinput>
The time is 09:18</screen></entry>
	    </row>

	    <row>
	      <entry>要參考的線上手冊</entry>
	      <entry>使用 <citerefentry><refentrytitle>su</refentrytitle><manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry> 來切換帳號。</entry>
	    </row>

	    <row>
	      <entry>使用者名稱和群組名稱</entry>
	      <entry>只有  <systemitem class="username">root</systemitem> 才可以做這件事。</entry>
	    </row>

	    <row>
	      <entry>語氣的強調。</entry>
	      <entry>使用者<emphasis>必須</emphasis>這樣做</entry>
	    </row>

	    <row>
	      <entry>打指令時，可替換的部份</entry>

	      <entry>要搜尋線上手冊的關鍵字，請輸入 <command>man -k <replaceable>關鍵字</replaceable></command></entry>
	    </row>

	    <row>
	      <entry>環境變數。</entry>
	      <entry><envar>$HOME</envar> 是指帳號的家目錄所在處。</entry>
	    </row>
	  </tbody>
	</tgroup>
      </informaltable>
    </sect1>

    <sect1 xml:id="preface-notes">
      <title>注意、技巧、重要訊息、警告、與範例的運用。</title>

      <para>出現在本文中的注意、警告、與範例。</para>

      <note>
	<para>注意：表示需要注意的事項，其中包括您需要注意的事情，因為這些事情可能會影響到操作結果。</para>
      </note>

      <tip>
	<para>提示：提供可能對您有用的資訊，例如簡化操作方式的技巧說明。</para>
      </tip>

      <important>
	<para>重要：表示要特別注意的事情。一般來說，它們會包括操作指令時需要加的額外參數。</para>
      </important>

      <warning>
	<para>警告：表示警告事項，比如如果您不則可能導致的損失。這些損失可能是對您或硬體造成實際傷害， 也可能是無法估計的損害，例如一時疏忽而刪除重要檔案...。</para>
      </warning>

      <example>
	<title>一個範例</title>

	<para>這是舉例說明而已，通常包含應遵循的指令範例，或顯示某些特定動作所可能發生的結果。</para>
      </example>
    </sect1>

    <sect1 xml:id="preface-acknowledgements">
      <title>感謝</title>

      <para>在此要感謝 Sue Blake, Patrick Durusau, Jon Hamilton, Peter Flynn, Christopher Maden 這些人的協助與閱讀初期草稿，並提供許多寶貴的潤稿意見與評論。</para>
    </sect1>
  </preface>

  
<!-- Copyright (c) 1998, 1999 Nik Clayton, All rights reserved.

     Redistribution and use in source (SGML DocBook) and 'compiled' forms
     (SGML HTML, PDF, PostScript, RTF and so forth) with or without
     modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
     are met:

      1. Redistributions of source code (SGML DocBook) must retain the above
         copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
         disclaimer as the first lines of this file unmodified.

      2. Redistributions in compiled form (transformed to other DTDs,
         converted to PDF, PostScript, RTF and other formats) must reproduce
         the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
         following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
         provided with the distribution.

     THIS DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED BY NIK CLAYTON "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR
     IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
     OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
     DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL NIK CLAYTON BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
     INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
     (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
     SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
     HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
     STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
     ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
     POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

     $FreeBSD$
-->
<chapter version="5.0" xml:id="overview">
  <title>概論</title>

  <para>歡迎參與 FreeBSD 文件計劃( 簡稱 <acronym>FDP</acronym> ) 。維持優秀質量的文件對 FreeBSD 的成功來說十分重要，您的點滴貢獻都是十分寶貴的。</para>

  <para>本文件描述：『 <acronym>FDP</acronym> 的架構有哪些』、『如何撰寫並提交文件』、 『如何有效運用工具來協助撰稿』。</para>

  <para>歡迎大家對 <acronym>FDP</acronym> 做出貢獻。唯一的成員要求就有貢獻的意願。</para>

  <para>本入門書指出如何：</para>

  <itemizedlist>
    <listitem>
      <para>瞭解有哪些文件是由 <acronym>FDP</acronym> 所維護的。</para>
    </listitem>

    <listitem>
      <para>安裝所需的文件工具和檔案</para>
    </listitem>

    <listitem>
      <para>修改文件</para>
    </listitem>

    <listitem>
      <para>提交修改以供審核並納入 FreeBSD 文件</para>
    </listitem>
  </itemizedlist>

  <sect1 xml:id="overview-doc">
    <title>FreeBSD 文件組</title>

    <para><acronym>FDP</acronym> 負責四類 FreeBSD 文件</para>

    <itemizedlist>
      <listitem>
	<para><emphasis>使用手冊</emphasis>： 使用手冊主要是給 FreeBSD 使用者提供詳盡的線上參考資料。</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
	<para><emphasis>FAQ</emphasis> 主要是收集在各郵件論壇或論壇會常問到或有可能會問到的 FreeBSD 相關問題與答案 。 (簡單講，就是『問答集』格式) 通常會擺在這裡面的問答格式，不會放太長的詳細內容。</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
	<para><emphasis>線上手冊 ( manual pages )</emphasis>:英文版的系統 manual 並不是由 <acronym>FDP</acronym> 所撰寫的，因為它們是屬於 base system 的部份。 然而，<acronym>FDP</acronym> 可以修改這些文件，來讓這些文件寫得更清楚，甚至是勘正錯誤的地方。</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
	<para><emphasis>網站</emphasis>: 這是 FreeBSD 在網路上的主要部份，位於 <link xlink:href="http://www.freebsd.org/index.html">http://www.FreeBSD.org/</link> 以及許多其他 mirror 站。這網站是許多人第一次接觸 FreeBSD 的地方</para>
      </listitem>
    </itemizedlist>

    <para>翻譯團隊負責翻譯使用手冊和網站到不同的語言。線上手冊目前並未翻譯</para>

    <para>FreeBSD 網站、使用手冊、和 <acronym>FAQ</acronym> 的文件原始碼可以在 <literal>https://svn.FreeBSD.org/doc/</literal> 的文件庫取得。</para>

    <para>線上手冊的原始碼則是在 <literal>https://svn.FreeBSD.org/base/</literal> 的原始碼庫可以取得。</para>

    <para>文件提交訊息可以用 <command>svn log</command> 察看。 提交訊息也會保存在<uri xlink:href="http://lists.FreeBSD.org/mailman/listinfo/svn-doc-all">http://lists.FreeBSD.org/mailman/listinfo/svn-doc-all</uri>。</para>

    <para>這些儲存庫的網頁版位於<link xlink:href="https://svnweb.FreeBSD.org/doc/"/> 和 <link xlink:href="https://svnweb.FreeBSD.org/base/"/>。</para>

    <para>許多人會寫 FreeBSD 的教學文件或是 how-to 文章。有些保存在 <acronym>FDP</acronym> 的檔案中。其他一些文件則是作者希望放在他處。<acronym>FDP</acronym> 會盡力提供這些文件的連結。</para>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="overview-quick-start">
    <title>快速上手</title>

    <para>在編輯 FreeBSD 文件之前，有一些準備工作要做。 首先，請訂閱  <link xlink:href="http://lists.FreeBSD.org/mailman/listinfo/freebsd-doc">FreeBSD 文件計劃郵件論壇</link>。 有些團隊成員也會出現在<link xlink:href="http://www.efnet.org/">EFnet</link>的<literal>#bsddocs</literal> <acronym>IRC</acronym> 頻道。這些人可以幫忙解決文件相關的問題。</para>

    <procedure>
      <step>
	<para>安裝 <package>textproc/docproj</package> 套件或 port。這個meta-port 會安裝所有編輯和建構 FreeBSD 文件需要的軟體。</para>
      </step>

      <step>
	<para>在<filename>~/doc</filename>安裝 FreeBSD 文件庫的本地端工作副本 ( 請見 <xref linkend="working-copy"/> )。</para>

	<screen><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>svn checkout https://svn.FreeBSD.org/doc/head <replaceable>~/doc</replaceable></userinput></screen>
      </step>

      <step>
	<para>設定文字編輯器：</para>

	<itemizedlist>
	  <listitem>
	    <para>Word wrap 設為70個字元。</para>
	  </listitem>

	  <listitem>
	    <para>Tab stops 設成 。</para>
	  </listitem>

	  <listitem>
	    <para>將句首每八個空白以一個 tab 替換。</para>
	  </listitem>
	</itemizedlist>

	<para>特定編輯器的設定方式列於 <xref linkend="editor-config"/>。</para>
      </step>

      <step>
	<para>更新本地端工作副本</para>

	<screen><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>svn up <replaceable>~/doc</replaceable></userinput></screen>
      </step>

      <step>
	<para>編輯需要修改的文件檔案。如果檔案需要大幅度的編修，請先諮詢郵件論壇。</para>

	<para>標籤 ( tag ) 和 entity 的使用方式可以參考 <xref linkend="xhtml-markup"/> 和 <xref linkend="docbook-markup"/>.  。</para>
      </step>

      <step>
	<para>編輯完後，執行以下指令來檢查是否有問題：</para>

	<screen><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>igor -R filename.xml | less -RS</userinput></screen>

	<para>檢查輸出並重新編輯檔案來修正顯示的錯誤，然後重新執行指令來找出剩下的問題。重複執行直到所有錯誤都解決完。</para>
      </step>

      <step>
	<para>修正送出前請先建構測試 (build-test ) 。在編輯的文件目錄最頂層執行 <userinput>make</userinput>，將會產生  split HTML  格式的文件。例如要建構 <acronym>HTML</acronym> 格式的英文版使用手冊，請在 <filename>en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/</filename> 目錄執行 <command>make</command> 。</para>
      </step>

      <step>
	<para>修改並測試完後，產生<quote>diff 檔</quote>：</para>

	<screen><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>cd ~/doc</userinput>
<prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>svn diff &gt; <replaceable>bsdinstall</replaceable>.diff.txt</userinput></screen>

	<para>設一個可辨識的檔名。如上例中，是使用手冊的<filename>bsdinstall</filename> 部份的修改。</para>
      </step>

      <step>
	<para>使用網頁版 <link xlink:href="@@URL_RELPREFIX@@/support.html#gnats">Problem Report</link> 系統提交 diff 檔。 如果使用網頁版，請輸入<emphasis>[修正檔] <replaceable>問題簡短描述</replaceable></emphasis>的概要 。選擇 <literal>docs</literal> 分類和 <literal>doc-bug</literal>類別。在訊息的主體中，輸入修正的簡短描述和其他相關的重要的細節。使用<guibutton>[ Browse... ]</guibutton> 按鈕來附加 diff 檔。</para>
      </step>
    </procedure>
  </sect1>
</chapter>

  
<!-- Copyright (c) 1998, 1999 Nik Clayton, All rights reserved.

     Redistribution and use in source (SGML DocBook) and 'compiled' forms
     (SGML, HTML, PDF, PostScript, RTF and so forth) with or without
     modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
     are met:

      1. Redistributions of source code (SGML DocBook) must retain the above
         copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
         disclaimer as the first lines of this file unmodified.

      2. Redistributions in compiled form (transformed to other DTDs,
         converted to PDF, PostScript, RTF and other formats) must reproduce
         the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
         following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
         provided with the distribution.

     THIS DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED BY NIK CLAYTON "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR
     IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
     OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
     DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL NIK CLAYTON BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
     INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
     (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
     SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
     HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
     STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
     ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
     POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

     $FreeBSD$
-->
<chapter version="5.0" xml:id="tools">
  <title>工具</title>

  <para>有些工具軟體用來管理 FreeBSD 文件，並將他轉換成不同的輸出格式。 有些則是在使用接下來章節的範例之前一定要安裝。有些工具是選擇性安裝的，但是裝了之後會更容易進行文件製作工作。</para>

  <sect1 xml:id="tools-required">
    <title>必備工具</title>

    <para>從 Ports Collection 安裝 <package>textproc/docproj</package>。這個  <emphasis>組合型 port (meta-port)</emphasis> 會安裝處理 FreeBSD 文件需要的所有應用程式。以下列出特定元件的進一步說明。</para>

    <sect2>
      <title><acronym>DTD</acronym>s 與 <acronym>Entities</acronym></title>

      <para>FreeBSD 文件使用幾種文件類型定義  (<acronym>DTD</acronym>s) 與 <acronym>XML</acronym> entities 組。這些都會經由 <package>textproc/docproj</package> port 來安裝。</para>

      <variablelist>
	<varlistentry>
	  <term><acronym>XHTML</acronym> <acronym>DTD</acronym> (<package>textproc/xhtml</package>)</term>

	  <listitem>
	    <para><acronym>XHTML</acronym> 是全球資訊網的一種標記語言，也是整個 FreeBSD 網站所使用的格式。</para>
	  </listitem>
	</varlistentry>

	<varlistentry>
	  <term>DocBook <acronym>DTD</acronym> (<package>textproc/docbook-xml-450</package>)</term>

	  <listitem>
	    <para>DocBook 設計來製作技術文件的標記語言版本。FreeBSD 文件是以 DocBook 來撰寫。</para>
	  </listitem>
	</varlistentry>

	<varlistentry>
	  <term>ISO 8879 entities (<package>textproc/iso8879</package>)</term>

	  <listitem>
	    <para>在 ISO 8879:1986 之中的 entity 被許多 <acronym>DTD</acronym> 所大量使用， 包括了數學符號、拉丁字母符號(尖重音等音節符號也是)以及希臘符號。</para>
	  </listitem>
	</varlistentry>
      </variablelist>
    </sect2>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="tools-optional">
    <title>輔助工具</title>

    <para>不一定得裝下列的應用程式才行，但是，出的格式也更具彈性。</para>

    <sect2>
      <title>軟體</title>

      <variablelist>

	<varlistentry>
	  <term><application>Vim</application> (<package>editors/vim</package>)</term>

	  <listitem>
	    <para>一個很受歡迎的編輯器，可以處理 <acronym>XML</acronym> 和他的衍生相關文件，例如 DocBook <acronym>XML</acronym>。</para>
	  </listitem>
	</varlistentry>

	<varlistentry>
	  <term><application>Emacs</application> 或 <application>XEmacs</application> (<package>editors/emacs</package> 或 <package>editors/xemacs</package>)</term>

	  <listitem>
	    <para>這兩個編輯器都包含特別模式來編輯用 <acronym>XML</acronym> <acronym>DTD</acronym> 標記的文件。這個模式包含指令來減少打字量，並可以幫忙減少錯誤的發生。</para>
	  </listitem>
	</varlistentry>
      </variablelist>
    </sect2>
  </sect1>
</chapter>

  
<!-- Copyright (c) 2013 Warren Block
    All rights reserved.

    Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
    modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
    are met:
    1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
    2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above
    copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
    disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
    with the distribution.

    THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHORS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
    IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
    LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
    FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
    AUTHORS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
    INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
    (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
    SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
    HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
    CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
    OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
    EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

    $FreeBSD$
-->
<chapter version="5.0" xml:id="working-copy">
  <title>工作副本</title>

  <para xml:lang="en">The <emphasis>working copy</emphasis> is a copy of the FreeBSD
    repository documentation tree downloaded onto the local computer.
    Changes are made to the local working copy, tested, and then
    submitted as patches to be committed to the main
    repository.</para>

  <para xml:lang="en">A full copy of the documentation tree can occupy 700 megabytes
    of disk space.  Allow for a full gigabyte of space to have room
    for temporary files and test versions of various output
    formats.</para>

  <para xml:lang="en"><link xlink:href="@@URL_RELPREFIX@@/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/svn.html"><application>Subversion</application></link>
    is used to manage the FreeBSD documentation files.  It is installed
    by <package>textproc/docproj</package> as one of
    the required applications.</para>

  <sect1 xml:id="working-copy-doc-and-src">
    <title xml:lang="en">Documentation and Manual Pages</title>

    <para xml:lang="en">FreeBSD documentation is not just books and articles.  Manual
      pages for all the commands and configuration files are also part
      of the documentation, and part of the <acronym>FDP</acronym>'s
      territory.  Two repositories are involved:
      <literal>doc</literal> for the books and articles, and
      <literal>base</literal> for the operating system and manual
      pages.  To edit manual pages, the <literal>base</literal>
      repository must be checked out separately.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en">Repositories may contain multiple versions of documentation
      and source code.  New modifications are almost always made only
      to the latest version, called <literal>head</literal>.</para>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="working-copy-choosing-directory">
    <title xml:lang="en">Choosing a Directory</title>

    <para xml:lang="en">FreeBSD documentation is traditionally stored in
      <filename>/usr/doc/</filename>, and system
      source code with manual pages in
      <filename>/usr/src/</filename>.  These
      directory trees are relocatable, and users may want to put the
      working copies in other locations to avoid interfering with
      existing information in the main directories.  The examples
      that follow use <filename>~/doc</filename>
      and <filename>~/src</filename>, both
      subdirectories of the user's home directory.</para>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="working-copy-checking-out">
    <title xml:lang="en">Checking Out a Copy</title>

    <para xml:lang="en">A download of a working copy from the repository is called
      a <emphasis>checkout</emphasis>, and done with
      <command>svn checkout</command>.  This example checks out a
      copy of the latest version (<literal>head</literal>) of
      the main documentation tree:</para>

    <screen><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>svn checkout https://svn.FreeBSD.org/doc/head <replaceable>~/doc</replaceable></userinput></screen>

    <para xml:lang="en">A checkout of the source code to work on manual pages is
      very similar:</para>

    <screen xml:lang="en"><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>svn checkout https://svn.FreeBSD.org/base/head <replaceable>~/src</replaceable></userinput></screen>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="working-copy-updating">
    <title xml:lang="en">Updating a Working Copy</title>

    <para xml:lang="en">The documents and files in the FreeBSD repository change daily.
      People modify files and commit changes frequently.  Even a short
      time after an initial checkout, there will already be
      differences between the local working copy and the main FreeBSD
      repository.  To update the local version with the changes that
      have been made to the main repository, use
      <command>svn update</command> on the directory containing the
      local working copy:</para>

    <screen><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>svn update <replaceable>~/doc</replaceable></userinput></screen>

    <para xml:lang="en">Get in the protective habit of using
      <command>svn update</command> before editing document files.
      Someone else may have edited that file very recently, and the
      local working copy will not include the latest changes until it
      has been updated.  Editing the newest version of a file is much
      easier than trying to combine an older, edited local file with
      the newer version from the repository.</para>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="working-copy-revert">
    <title xml:lang="en">Reverting Changes</title>

    <para xml:lang="en">Sometimes it turns out that changes were
      not necessary after all, or the writer just wants to start over.
      Files can be <quote>reset</quote> to their unchanged form with
      <command>svn revert</command>.  For example, to erase the edits
      made to <filename>chapter.xml</filename> and reset it to
      unmodified form:</para>

    <screen xml:lang="en"><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>svn revert chapter.xml</userinput></screen>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="working-copy-making-diff">
    <title xml:lang="en">Making a Diff</title>

    <para xml:lang="en">After edits to a file or group of files are completed, the
      differences between the local working copy and the version on
      the FreeBSD repository must be collected into a single file for
      submission.  These <emphasis>diff</emphasis> files are produced
      by redirecting the output of <command>svn diff</command> into a
      file:</para>

    <screen xml:lang="en"><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>cd <replaceable>~/doc</replaceable></userinput>
<prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>svn diff &gt; <replaceable>doc-fix-spelling.diff</replaceable></userinput></screen>

    <para xml:lang="en">Give the file a meaningful name that identifies the
      contents.  The example above is for spelling fixes to the whole
      documentation tree.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en">If the diff file is to be submitted with the web
      <quote><link xlink:href="https://bugs.FreeBSD.org/bugzilla/enter_bug.cgi">Submit a FreeBSD
	  problem report</link></quote> interface, add a
      <filename>.txt</filename> extension to give the earnest and
      simple-minded web form a clue that the contents are plain
      text.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en">Be careful: <command>svn diff</command> includes all changes
      made in the current directory and any subdirectories.  If there
      are files in the working copy with edits that are not ready to
      be submitted yet, provide a list of only the files that are to
      be included:</para>

    <screen xml:lang="en"><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>cd <replaceable>~/doc</replaceable></userinput>
<prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>svn diff <replaceable>disks/chapter.xml printers/chapter.xml</replaceable> &gt; <replaceable>disks-printers.diff</replaceable></userinput></screen>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="working-copy-subversion-references">
    <title xml:lang="en"><application>Subversion</application> References</title>

    <para xml:lang="en">These examples show very basic usage of
      <application>Subversion</application>.  More detail is available
      in the <link xlink:href="http://svnbook.red-bean.com/">Subversion Book</link>
      and the <link xlink:href="http://subversion.apache.org/docs/">Subversion
	documentation</link>.</para>
  </sect1>
</chapter>

  
<!-- Copyright (c) 1998, 1999 Nik Clayton, All rights reserved.

     Redistribution and use in source (SGML DocBook) and 'compiled' forms
     (SGML HTML, PDF, PostScript, RTF and so forth) with or without
     modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
     are met:

      1. Redistributions of source code (SGML DocBook) must retain the above
         copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
         disclaimer as the first lines of this file unmodified.

      2. Redistributions in compiled form (transformed to other DTDs,
         converted to PDF, PostScript, RTF and other formats) must reproduce
         the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
         following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
         provided with the distribution.

     THIS DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED BY NIK CLAYTON "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR
     IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
     OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
     DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL NIK CLAYTON BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
     INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
     (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
     SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
     HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
     STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
     ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
     POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

     $FreeBSD$
-->
<chapter version="5.0" xml:id="structure">
  <title xml:lang="en">Documentation Directory Structure</title>

  <para xml:lang="en">Files and directories in the
    <filename>doc/</filename> tree follow a
    structure meant to:</para>

  <orderedlist>
    <listitem>
      <para xml:lang="en">Make it easy to automate converting the document to other
	formats.</para>
    </listitem>

    <listitem>
      <para xml:lang="en">Promote consistency between the different documentation
	organizations, to make it easier to switch between working on
	different documents.</para>
    </listitem>

    <listitem>
      <para xml:lang="en">Make it easy to decide where in the tree new documentation
	should be placed.</para>
    </listitem>
  </orderedlist>

  <para xml:lang="en">In addition, the documentation tree must accommodate
    documents in many different languages and encodings.  It is
    important that the documentation tree structure does not enforce
    any particular defaults or cultural preferences.</para>

  <sect1 xml:id="structure-top">
    <title xml:lang="en">The Top Level,
      <filename>doc/</filename></title>

    <para xml:lang="en">There are two types of directory under
      <filename>doc/</filename>, each with very
      specific directory names and meanings.</para>

    <informaltable pgwide="1" frame="none">
      <tgroup cols="2">
	<thead>
	  <row>
	    <entry xml:lang="en">Directory</entry>
	    <entry xml:lang="en">Usage</entry>
	  </row>
	</thead>

	<tbody>
	  <row>
	    <entry valign="top" xml:lang="en">
	      <filename>share</filename></entry>

	    <entry xml:lang="en">Contains files that are not specific to the various
	      translations and encodings of the documentation.
	      Contains subdirectories to further categorize the
	      information.  For example, the files that comprise the
	      <citerefentry><refentrytitle>make</refentrytitle><manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry> infrastructure are in
	      <filename>share/mk</filename>, while
	      the additional <acronym>XML</acronym> support files
	      (such as the FreeBSD extended DocBook
	      <acronym>DTD</acronym>) are in <filename>share/xml</filename>.</entry>
	  </row>

	  <row>
	    <entry valign="top" xml:lang="en">
		<filename><replaceable>lang</replaceable>.<replaceable>encoding</replaceable></filename></entry>

	    <entry xml:lang="en">One directory exists for each available translation
	      and encoding of the documentation, for example
	      <filename>en_US.ISO8859-1/</filename>
	      and <filename>zh_TW.UTF-8/</filename>.
	      The names are long, but by fully specifying the language
	      and encoding we prevent any future headaches when a
	      translation team wants to provide documentation in the
	      same language but in more than one encoding.  This also
	      avoids problems that might be caused by a future switch
	      to Unicode.</entry>
	  </row>
	</tbody>
      </tgroup>
    </informaltable>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="structure-locale">
    <title xml:lang="en">The
      <filename><replaceable>lang</replaceable>.<replaceable>encoding</replaceable>/</filename>
      Directories</title>

    <para xml:lang="en">These directories contain the documents themselves.  The
      documentation is split into up to three more categories at
      this level, indicated by the different directory names.</para>

    <informaltable pgwide="1" frame="none">
      <tgroup cols="2">
	<thead>
	  <row>
	    <entry xml:lang="en">Directory</entry>
	    <entry xml:lang="en">Usage</entry>
	  </row>
	</thead>

	<tbody>
	  <row>
	    <entry valign="top" xml:lang="en">
	      <filename>articles</filename></entry>

	    <entry xml:lang="en">Documentation marked up as a DocBook
	      <tag>article</tag> (or equivalent).  Reasonably
	      short, and broken up into sections.  Normally only
	      available as one <acronym>XHTML</acronym> file.</entry>
	  </row>

	  <row>
	    <entry valign="top" xml:lang="en"><filename>books</filename></entry>

	    <entry xml:lang="en">Documentation marked up as a DocBook
	      <tag>book</tag> (or equivalent).  Book length,
	      and broken up into chapters.  Normally available as both
	      one large <acronym>XHTML</acronym> file (for people with
	      fast connections, or who want to print it easily from a
	      browser) and as a collection of linked, smaller
	      files.</entry>
	  </row>

	  <row>
	    <entry valign="top" xml:lang="en">
	      <filename>man</filename></entry>

	    <entry xml:lang="en">For translations of the system manual pages.  This
	      directory will contain one or more <filename role="directory">man<replaceable>n</replaceable></filename>
	      directories, corresponding to the sections that have
	      been translated.</entry>
	  </row>
	</tbody>
      </tgroup>
    </informaltable>

    <para xml:lang="en">Not every <filename role="directory"><replaceable>lang</replaceable>.<replaceable>encoding</replaceable></filename>
      directory will have all of these subdirectories.  It depends
      on how much translation has been accomplished by that
      translation team.</para>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="structure-document">
    <title xml:lang="en">Document-Specific Information</title>

    <para xml:lang="en">This section contains specific notes about particular
      documents managed by the FDP.</para>

    <sect2>
      <title xml:lang="en">The Handbook</title>

      <subtitle xml:lang="en"><filename>books/handbook/</filename></subtitle>

      <para xml:lang="en">The Handbook is written in DocBook <acronym>XML</acronym>
	using the FreeBSD DocBook extended <acronym>DTD</acronym>.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">The Handbook is organized as a DocBook
	<tag>book</tag>.  The book is divided into
	<tag>part</tag>s, each of which contains several
	<tag>chapter</tag>s.  <tag>chapter</tag>s are
	further subdivided into sections (<tag>sect1</tag>)
	and subsections (<tag>sect2</tag>,
	<tag>sect3</tag>) and so on.</para>

      <sect3>
	<title xml:lang="en">Physical Organization</title>

	<para xml:lang="en">There are a number of files and directories within the
	  <filename>handbook</filename> directory.</para>

	<note>
	  <para xml:lang="en">The Handbook's organization may change over time, and
	    this document may lag in detailing the organizational
	    changes.  Post questions about Handbook organization to the
	    <link xlink:href="http://lists.FreeBSD.org/mailman/listinfo/freebsd-doc">FreeBSD documentation project mailing list</link>.</para>
	</note>

	<sect4>
	  <title xml:lang="en"><filename>Makefile</filename></title>

	  <para xml:lang="en">The <filename>Makefile</filename> defines some
	    variables that affect how the <acronym>XML</acronym>
	    source is converted to other formats, and lists the
	    various source files that make up the Handbook.  It then
	    includes the standard <filename>doc.project.mk</filename>,
	    to bring in the rest of the code that handles converting
	    documents from one format to another.</para>
	</sect4>

	<sect4>
	  <title xml:lang="en"><filename>book.xml</filename></title>

	  <para xml:lang="en">This is the top level document in the Handbook.  It
	    contains the Handbook's <link linkend="xml-primer-doctype-declaration">DOCTYPE
	      declaration</link>, as well as the elements that
	    describe the Handbook's structure.</para>

	  <para xml:lang="en"><filename>book.xml</filename> uses <link linkend="xml-primer-parameter-entities">parameter
	      entities</link> to load in the files with the
	    <filename>.ent</filename> extension.  These files
	    (described later) then define <link linkend="xml-primer-general-entities">general
	      entities</link> that are used throughout the rest of the
	    Handbook.</para>
	</sect4>

	<sect4>
	  <title xml:lang="en"><filename role="directory"><replaceable>directory</replaceable>/chapter.xml</filename></title>

	  <para xml:lang="en">Each chapter in the Handbook is stored in a file
	    called <filename>chapter.xml</filename> in a separate
	    directory from the other chapters.  Each directory is
	    named after the value of the <literal>id</literal>
	    attribute on the <tag>chapter</tag>
	    element.</para>

	  <para xml:lang="en">For example, if one of the chapter files
	    contains:</para>

	  <programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">chapter id="kernelconfig"</tag>
...
<tag class="endtag">chapter</tag></programlisting>

	  <para xml:lang="en">Then it will be called
	    <filename>chapter.xml</filename> in the
	    <filename>kernelconfig</filename> directory.  In general,
	    the entire contents of the chapter are in this one
	    file.</para>

	  <para xml:lang="en">When the <acronym>XHTML</acronym> version of the
	    Handbook is produced, this will yield
	    <filename>kernelconfig.html</filename>.  This is because
	    of the <literal>id</literal> value, and is not related to
	    the name of the directory.</para>

	  <para xml:lang="en">In earlier versions of the Handbook, the files were
	    stored in the same directory as
	    <filename>book.xml</filename>, and named after the value
	    of the <literal>id</literal> attribute on the file's
	    <tag>chapter</tag> element.  Now, it is possible
	    to include images in each chapter.  Images for each
	    Handbook chapter are stored within <filename>share/images/books/handbook</filename>.
	    The localized version of these images should be
	    placed in the same directory as the <acronym>XML</acronym>
	    sources for each chapter.  Namespace collisions are
	    inevitable, and it is easier to work with several
	    directories with a few files in them than it is to work
	    with one directory that has many files in it.</para>

	  <para xml:lang="en">A brief look will show that there are many directories
	    with individual <filename>chapter.xml</filename> files,
	    including <filename>basics/chapter.xml</filename>,
	    <filename>introduction/chapter.xml</filename>, and
	    <filename>printing/chapter.xml</filename>.</para>

	  <important>
	    <para xml:lang="en">Do not name chapters or directories after
	      their ordering within the Handbook.  This ordering can
	      change as the content within the Handbook is
	      reorganized.  Reorganization should be possible without
	      renaming files, unless entire chapters are being
	      promoted or demoted within the hierarchy.</para>
	  </important>

	  <para xml:lang="en">The <filename>chapter.xml</filename> files are not
	    complete <acronym>XML</acronym> documents that can be
	    built individually.  They can only be built
	    as parts of the whole Handbook.</para>
	</sect4>
      </sect3>
    </sect2>
  </sect1>
</chapter>

  
<!-- Copyright (c) 1999 Neil Blakey-Milner, All rights reserved.

     Redistribution and use in source (SGML DocBook) and 'compiled' forms
     (SGML HTML, PDF, PostScript, RTF and so forth) with or without
     modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
     are met:

      1. Redistributions of source code (SGML DocBook) must retain the above
         copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
         disclaimer as the first lines of this file unmodified.

      2. Redistributions in compiled form (transformed to other DTDs,
         converted to PDF, PostScript, RTF and other formats) must reproduce
         the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
         following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
         provided with the distribution.

     THIS DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR
     IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
     OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
     DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL NIK CLAYTON BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
     INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
     (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
     SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
     HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
     STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
     ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
     POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

     $FreeBSD$
-->
<chapter version="5.0" xml:id="doc-build">
  <title xml:lang="en">The Documentation Build Process</title>

  <para xml:lang="en">This chapter covers organization of the documentation build
    process and how <citerefentry><refentrytitle>make</refentrytitle><manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry> is used to control it.</para>

  <sect1 xml:id="doc-build-rendering">
    <title xml:lang="en">Rendering DocBook into Output</title>

    <para xml:lang="en">Different types of output can be produced from a single
      DocBook source file.  The type of output desired is set with the
      <varname>FORMATS</varname> variable.  A list of known formats is
      stored in <varname>KNOWN_FORMATS</varname>:</para>

    <screen xml:id="doc-build-rendering-known-formats" xml:lang="en"><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>cd ~/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook</userinput>
<prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>make -V KNOWN_FORMATS</userinput></screen>

    <table xml:id="doc-build-rendering-common-formats" frame="none">
      <title xml:lang="en">Common Output Formats</title>

      <tgroup cols="3">
	<thead>
	  <row>
	    <entry xml:lang="en"><varname>FORMATS</varname> Value</entry>
	    <entry xml:lang="en">File Type</entry>
	    <entry xml:lang="en">Description</entry>
	  </row>
	</thead>

	<tbody>
	  <row>
	    <entry xml:lang="en"><literal>html</literal></entry>
	    <entry xml:lang="en"><acronym>HTML</acronym>, one file</entry>
	    <entry xml:lang="en">A single <filename>book.html</filename> or
	      <filename>article.html</filename>.</entry>
	  </row>

	  <row>
	    <entry xml:lang="en"><literal>html-split</literal></entry>
	    <entry xml:lang="en"><acronym>HTML</acronym>, multiple files</entry>
	    <entry xml:lang="en">Multiple <acronym>HTML</acronym> files, one for
	      each chapter or section, for use on a typical web
	      site.</entry>
	  </row>

	  <row>
	    <entry xml:lang="en"><literal>pdf</literal></entry>
	    <entry xml:lang="en"><acronym>PDF</acronym></entry>
	    <entry xml:lang="en">Portable Document Format</entry>
	  </row>
	</tbody>
      </tgroup>
    </table>

    <para xml:lang="en">The default output format can vary by document, but is
      usually <literal>html-split</literal>.  Other formats are chosen
      by setting <varname>FORMATS</varname> to a specific value.
      Multiple output formats can be created at a single time by
      setting <varname>FORMATS</varname> to a list of formats.</para>

    <example xml:id="doc-build-formats-example-html">
      <title xml:lang="en">Build a Single HTML Output File</title>

      <screen xml:lang="en"><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>cd ~/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook</userinput>
<prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>make FORMATS=html</userinput></screen>
    </example>

    <example xml:id="doc-build-formats-example-html-split-pdf">
      <title xml:lang="en">Build HTML-Split and <acronym>PDF</acronym> Output
	Files</title>

      <screen xml:lang="en"><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>cd ~/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook</userinput>
<prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>make FORMATS="html-split pdf"</userinput></screen>
    </example>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="doc-build-toolset">
    <title xml:lang="en">The FreeBSD Documentation Build Toolset</title>

    <para xml:lang="en">These are the tools used to build and install the
      <acronym>FDP</acronym> documentation.</para>

    <itemizedlist>
      <listitem>
	<para xml:lang="en">The primary build tool is <citerefentry><refentrytitle>make</refentrytitle><manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry>, specifically
	  <application>Berkeley Make</application>.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
	<para xml:lang="en">Package building is handled by FreeBSD's
	  <citerefentry><refentrytitle>pkg-create</refentrytitle><manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry>.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
	<para xml:lang="en"><citerefentry><refentrytitle>gzip</refentrytitle><manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry> is used to create compressed versions of
	  the document.  <citerefentry><refentrytitle>bzip2</refentrytitle><manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry> archives are also supported.
	  <citerefentry><refentrytitle>tar</refentrytitle><manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry> is used for package building.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
	<para xml:lang="en"><citerefentry><refentrytitle>install</refentrytitle><manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry> is used to install the
	  documentation.</para>
      </listitem>
    </itemizedlist>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="doc-build-makefiles">

    <title xml:lang="en">Understanding <filename>Makefile</filename>s in the
      Documentation Tree</title>

    <para xml:lang="en">There are three main types of <filename>Makefile</filename>s
      in the FreeBSD Documentation Project tree.</para>

    <itemizedlist>
      <listitem>
	<para xml:lang="en"><link linkend="sub-make">Subdirectory
	    <filename>Makefile</filename>s</link> simply pass
	  commands to those directories below them.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
	<para xml:lang="en"><link linkend="doc-make">Documentation
	    <filename>Makefile</filename>s</link> describe the
	  documents that are produced from this
	  directory.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
	<para xml:lang="en"><link linkend="make-includes"><application>Make</application>
	  includes</link> are the glue that perform the document
	  production, and are usually of the form
	  <filename>doc.<replaceable>xxx</replaceable>.mk</filename>.</para>
      </listitem>
    </itemizedlist>

    <sect2 xml:id="sub-make">
      <title xml:lang="en">Subdirectory <filename>Makefile</filename>s</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">These <filename>Makefile</filename>s usually take the form
	of:</para>

      <programlisting xml:lang="en">SUBDIR =articles
SUBDIR+=books

COMPAT_SYMLINK = en

DOC_PREFIX?= ${.CURDIR}/..
.include "${DOC_PREFIX}/share/mk/doc.project.mk"</programlisting>

      <para xml:lang="en">The first four non-empty lines define the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>make</refentrytitle><manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry>
	variables <varname>SUBDIR</varname>,
	<varname>COMPAT_SYMLINK</varname>, and
	<varname>DOC_PREFIX</varname>.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">The <varname>SUBDIR</varname> statement and
	<varname>COMPAT_SYMLINK</varname> statement show how to
	assign a value to a variable, overriding any previous
	value.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">The second <varname>SUBDIR</varname> statement shows how a
	value is appended to the current value of a variable.  The
	<varname>SUBDIR</varname> variable is now <literal>articles
	  books</literal>.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">The <varname>DOC_PREFIX</varname> assignment shows how a
	value is assigned to the variable, but only if it is not
	already defined.  This is useful if
	<varname>DOC_PREFIX</varname> is not where this
	<filename>Makefile</filename> thinks it is - the user can
	override this and provide the correct value.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">What does it all mean?  <varname>SUBDIR</varname>
	mentions which subdirectories below this one the build process
	should pass any work on to.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en"><varname>COMPAT_SYMLINK</varname> is specific to
	compatibility symlinks (amazingly enough) for languages to
	their official encoding (<filename>doc/en</filename> would
	point to <filename>en_US.ISO-8859-1</filename>).</para>

      <para xml:lang="en"><varname>DOC_PREFIX</varname> is the path to the root of
	the FreeBSD Document Project tree.  This is not always that easy
	to find, and is also easily overridden, to allow for
	flexibility.  <varname>.CURDIR</varname> is a <citerefentry><refentrytitle>make</refentrytitle><manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry>
	builtin variable with the path to the current
	directory.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">The final line includes the FreeBSD Documentation Project's
	project-wide <citerefentry><refentrytitle>make</refentrytitle><manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry> system file
	<filename>doc.project.mk</filename> which is the glue which
	converts these variables into build instructions.</para>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="doc-make">
      <title xml:lang="en">Documentation <filename>Makefile</filename>s</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">These <filename>Makefile</filename>s set <citerefentry><refentrytitle>make</refentrytitle><manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry>
	variables that describe how to build the documentation
	contained in that directory.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">Here is an example:</para>

      <programlisting xml:lang="en">MAINTAINER=nik@FreeBSD.org

DOC?= book

FORMATS?= html-split html

INSTALL_COMPRESSED?= gz
INSTALL_ONLY_COMPRESSED?=

# SGML content
SRCS=  book.xml

DOC_PREFIX?= ${.CURDIR}/../../..

.include "$(DOC_PREFIX)/share/mk/docproj.docbook.mk"</programlisting>

      <para xml:lang="en">The <varname>MAINTAINER</varname> variable allows
	committers to claim ownership of a document in the FreeBSD
	Documentation Project, and take responsibility for maintaining
	it.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en"><varname>DOC</varname> is the name (sans the
	<filename>.xml</filename> extension) of the main document
	created by this directory.  <varname>SRCS</varname> lists all
	the individual files that make up the document.  This should
	also include important files in which a change should result
	in a rebuild.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en"><varname>FORMATS</varname> indicates the default formats
	that should be built for this document.
	<varname>INSTALL_COMPRESSED</varname> is the default list of
	compression techniques that should be used in the document
	build.  <varname>INSTALL_ONLY_COMPRESS</varname>, empty by
	default, should be non-empty if only compressed documents are
	desired in the build.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">The <varname>DOC_PREFIX</varname> and include statements
	should be familiar already.</para>
    </sect2>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="make-includes">
    <title xml:lang="en">FreeBSD Documentation Project
      <application>Make</application> Includes</title>

    <para xml:lang="en"><citerefentry><refentrytitle>make</refentrytitle><manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry> includes are best explained by inspection of
      the code.  Here are the system include files:</para>

    <itemizedlist>
      <listitem>
	<para xml:lang="en"><filename>doc.project.mk</filename> is the main project
	  include file, which includes all the following include
	  files, as necessary.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
	<para xml:lang="en"><filename>doc.subdir.mk</filename> handles traversing of
	  the document tree during the build and install
	  processes.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
	<para xml:lang="en"><filename>doc.install.mk</filename> provides variables
	  that affect ownership and installation of documents.</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
	<para xml:lang="en"><filename>doc.docbook.mk</filename> is included if
	  <varname>DOCFORMAT</varname> is <literal>docbook</literal>
	  and <varname>DOC</varname> is set.</para>
      </listitem>
    </itemizedlist>

    <sect2>
      <title xml:lang="en"><filename>doc.project.mk</filename></title>

      <para xml:lang="en">By inspection:</para>

      <programlisting xml:lang="en">DOCFORMAT?=	docbook
MAINTAINER?=	doc@FreeBSD.org

PREFIX?=	/usr/local
PRI_LANG?=	en_US.ISO8859-1

.if defined(DOC)
.if ${DOCFORMAT} == "docbook"
.include "doc.docbook.mk"
.endif
.endif

.include "doc.subdir.mk"
.include "doc.install.mk"</programlisting>

      <sect3>

	<title xml:lang="en">Variables</title>

	<para xml:lang="en"><varname>DOCFORMAT</varname> and
	  <varname>MAINTAINER</varname> are assigned default values,
	  if these are not set by the document make file.</para>

	<para xml:lang="en"><varname>PREFIX</varname> is the prefix under which the
	  <link linkend="tools">documentation building tools</link>
	  are installed.  For normal package and port installation,
	  this is <filename>/usr/local</filename>.</para>

	<para xml:lang="en"><varname>PRI_LANG</varname> should be set to whatever
	  language and encoding is natural amongst users these
	  documents are being built for.  US English is the
	  default.</para>

	<note>
	  <para xml:lang="en"><varname>PRI_LANG</varname> does not affect which
	    documents can, or even will, be built.  Its main use is
	    creating links to commonly referenced documents into the
	    FreeBSD documentation install root.</para>
	</note>
      </sect3>

      <sect3>
	<title xml:lang="en">Conditionals</title>

	<para xml:lang="en">The <literal>.if defined(DOC)</literal> line is an
	  example of a <citerefentry><refentrytitle>make</refentrytitle><manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry> conditional which, like in other
	  programs, defines behavior if some condition is true or if
	  it is false.  <literal>defined</literal> is a function which
	  returns whether the variable given is defined or not.</para>

	<para xml:lang="en"><literal>.if ${DOCFORMAT} == "docbook"</literal>, next,
	  tests whether the <varname>DOCFORMAT</varname> variable is
	  <literal>"docbook"</literal>, and in this case, includes
	  <filename>doc.docbook.mk</filename>.</para>

	<para xml:lang="en">The two <literal>.endif</literal>s close the two above
	  conditionals, marking the end of their application.</para>
      </sect3>
    </sect2>

    <sect2>
      <title xml:lang="en"><filename>doc.subdir.mk</filename></title>

      <para xml:lang="en">This file is too long to explain in detail.  These notes
	describe the most important features.</para>

      <sect3>
	<title xml:lang="en">Variables</title>

	<itemizedlist>
	  <listitem>
	    <para xml:lang="en"><varname>SUBDIR</varname> is a list of
	      subdirectories that the build process should go further
	      down into.</para>
	  </listitem>

	  <listitem>
	    <para xml:lang="en"><varname>ROOT_SYMLINKS</varname> is the name of
	      directories that should be linked to the document
	      install root from their actual locations, if the current
	      language is the primary language (specified by
	      <varname>PRI_LANG</varname>).</para>
	  </listitem>

	  <listitem>
	    <para xml:lang="en"><varname>COMPAT_SYMLINK</varname> is described in
	      the
	      <link linkend="sub-make">Subdirectory Makefile</link>
	      section.</para>
	  </listitem>
	</itemizedlist>
      </sect3>

      <sect3>
	<title xml:lang="en">Targets and Macros</title>

	<para xml:lang="en">Dependencies are described by
	  <literal><replaceable>target</replaceable>:
	      <replaceable>dependency1 dependency2
	      ...</replaceable></literal> tuples, where to build
	  <literal>target</literal>, the given
	  dependencies must be built first.</para>

	<para xml:lang="en">After that descriptive tuple, instructions on how to
	  build the target may be given, if the conversion process
	  between the target and its dependencies are not previously
	  defined, or if this particular conversion is not the same as
	  the default conversion method.</para>

	<para xml:lang="en">A special dependency <literal>.USE</literal> defines
	  the equivalent of a macro.</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en">_SUBDIRUSE: .USE
.for entry in ${SUBDIR}
	@${ECHO} "===&gt; ${DIRPRFX}${entry}"
	@(cd ${.CURDIR}/${entry} &amp;&amp; \
	${MAKE} ${.TARGET:S/realpackage/package/:S/realinstall/install/} DIRPRFX=${DIRPRFX}${entry}/ )
.endfor</programlisting>

	<para xml:lang="en">In the above, <buildtarget xml:lang="en">_SUBDIRUSE</buildtarget> is now
	  a macro which will execute the given commands when it is
	  listed as a dependency.</para>

	<para xml:lang="en">What sets this macro apart from other targets?
	  Basically, it is executed <emphasis>after</emphasis> the
	  instructions given in the build procedure it is listed as a
	  dependency to, and it does not adjust
	  <varname>.TARGET</varname>, which is the variable which
	  contains the name of the target currently being
	  built.</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en">clean: _SUBDIRUSE
	rm -f ${CLEANFILES}</programlisting>

	<para xml:lang="en">In the above, <buildtarget xml:lang="en">clean</buildtarget> will use
	  the <buildtarget xml:lang="en">_SUBDIRUSE</buildtarget> macro after it has
	  executed the instruction
	  <command>rm -f ${CLEANFILES}</command>.  In effect, this
	  causes <buildtarget xml:lang="en">clean</buildtarget> to go further and
	  further down the directory tree, deleting built files as it
	  goes <emphasis>down</emphasis>, not on the way back
	  up.</para>

	<sect4>
	  <title xml:lang="en">Provided Targets</title>

	  <itemizedlist>
	    <listitem>
	      <para xml:lang="en"><buildtarget xml:lang="en">install</buildtarget> and
		<buildtarget xml:lang="en">package</buildtarget> both go down the
		directory tree calling the real versions of themselves
		in the subdirectories
		(<buildtarget xml:lang="en">realinstall</buildtarget> and
		<buildtarget xml:lang="en">realpackage</buildtarget>
		respectively).</para>
	    </listitem>

	    <listitem>
	      <para xml:lang="en"><buildtarget xml:lang="en">clean</buildtarget> removes files
		created by the build process (and goes down the
		directory tree too).
		<buildtarget xml:lang="en">cleandir</buildtarget> does the same, and
		also removes the object directory, if any.</para>
	    </listitem>
	  </itemizedlist>
	</sect4>
      </sect3>

      <sect3>
	<title xml:lang="en">More on Conditionals</title>

	<itemizedlist>
	  <listitem>
	    <para xml:lang="en"><literal>exists</literal> is another condition
	      function which returns true if the given file
	      exists.</para>
	  </listitem>

	  <listitem>
	    <para xml:lang="en"><literal>empty</literal> returns true if the given
	      variable is empty.</para>
	  </listitem>

	  <listitem>
	    <para xml:lang="en"><literal>target</literal> returns true if the given
	      target does not already exist.</para>
	  </listitem>
	</itemizedlist>
      </sect3>

      <sect3>
	<title xml:lang="en">Looping Constructs in <command>make
	    (.for)</command></title>

	<para xml:lang="en"><literal>.for</literal> provides a way to repeat a set
	  of instructions for each space-separated element in a
	  variable.  It does this by assigning a variable to contain
	  the current element in the list being examined.</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en">_SUBDIRUSE: .USE
.for entry in ${SUBDIR}
	@${ECHO} "===&gt; ${DIRPRFX}${entry}"
	@(cd ${.CURDIR}/${entry} &amp;&amp; \
	${MAKE} ${.TARGET:S/realpackage/package/:S/realinstall/install/} DIRPRFX=${DIRPRFX}${entry}/ )
.endfor</programlisting>

	<para xml:lang="en">In the above, if <varname>SUBDIR</varname> is empty, no
	  action is taken; if it has one or more elements, the
	  instructions between <literal>.for</literal> and
	  <literal>.endfor</literal> would repeat for every element,
	  with <varname>entry</varname> being replaced with the value
	  of the current element.</para>
      </sect3>
    </sect2>
  </sect1>
</chapter>

  
<!-- Copyright (c) 1998, 1999 Nik Clayton, All rights reserved.

     Redistribution and use in source (SGML DocBook) and 'compiled' forms
     (SGML HTML, PDF, PostScript, RTF and so forth) with or without
     modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
     are met:

      1. Redistributions of source code (SGML DocBook) must retain the above
         copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
         disclaimer as the first lines of this file unmodified.

      2. Redistributions in compiled form (transformed to other DTDs,
         converted to PDF, PostScript, RTF and other formats) must reproduce
         the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
         following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
         provided with the distribution.

     THIS DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED BY NIK CLAYTON "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR
     IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
     OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
     DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL NIK CLAYTON BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
     INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
     (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
     SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
     HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
     STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
     ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
     POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

     $FreeBSD$
-->
<chapter version="5.0" xml:id="the-website">
  <title>網站</title>

  <para>FreeBSD 網站是 FreeBSD 文件的一部份。網站的檔案儲存在文件樹目錄，此例中是 <filename>~/doc</filename>，的 <filename>en_US.ISO8859-1/htdocs</filename> 子目錄。</para>

  <sect1 xml:id="the-website-env">
    <title>環境變數</title>

    <para>有些環境變數控制網站的建構或安裝，和裝到哪個目錄</para>

    <tip>
      <para xml:lang="en">The web build system uses <citerefentry><refentrytitle>make</refentrytitle><manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry>, and considers
	variables to be set when they have been defined, even if they
	are empty.  The examples here show the recommended ways of
	defining and using these variables.  Setting or defining these
	variables with other values or methods might lead to
	unexpected surprises.</para>
    </tip>

    <variablelist>
      <varlistentry xml:id="the-website-env-destdir">
	<term xml:lang="en"><varname>DESTDIR</varname></term>

	<listitem>
	  <para xml:lang="en">DESTDIR specifies the path where the web site files
	    are to be installed.</para>

	  <para xml:lang="en">This variable is best set with <citerefentry><refentrytitle>env</refentrytitle><manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry> or the user
	    shell's method of setting environment variables,
	    <command>setenv</command> for <citerefentry><refentrytitle>csh</refentrytitle><manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry> or
	    <command>export</command> for <citerefentry><refentrytitle>sh</refentrytitle><manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry>.</para>
	</listitem>
      </varlistentry>
    </variablelist>

    <variablelist>
      <varlistentry xml:id="the-website-env-englishonly">
	<term xml:lang="en"><varname>ENGLISH_ONLY</varname></term>

	<listitem>
	  <para xml:lang="en">Default: undefined.  Build and include all
	    translations.</para>

	  <para xml:lang="en"><userinput>ENGLISH_ONLY=yes</userinput>: use only
	    the English documents and ignore all translations.</para>
	</listitem>
      </varlistentry>

      <varlistentry xml:id="the-website-env-webonly">
	<term xml:lang="en"><varname>WEB_ONLY</varname></term>

	<listitem>
	  <para xml:lang="en">Default: undefined.  Build both the web site
	    and all the books and articles.</para>

	  <para xml:lang="en"><userinput>WEB_ONLY=yes</userinput>: build or install
	    only <acronym>HTML</acronym> pages from the
	    <filename>en_US.ISO8859-1/htdocs</filename> directory.
	    Other directories and documents, including books and
	    articles, will be ignored.</para>
	</listitem>
      </varlistentry>

      <varlistentry xml:id="the-website-env-weblang">
	<term xml:lang="en"><varname>WEB_LANG</varname></term>

	<listitem>
	  <para xml:lang="en">Default: undefined.  Build and include all the
	    available languages on the web site.</para>

	  <para xml:lang="en">Set to a space-separated list of languages to be
	    included in the build
	    or install.  The formats are the same as the directory
	    names in the document root directory.  For example, to
	    include the German and French documents:</para>

	  <screen xml:lang="en"><userinput>WEB_LANG="de_DE.ISO8859-1 fr_FR.ISO8859-1"</userinput></screen>
	</listitem>
      </varlistentry>
    </variablelist>

    <para xml:lang="en"><varname>WEB_ONLY</varname>, <varname>WEB_LANG</varname>,
      and <varname>ENGLISH_ONLY</varname> are <citerefentry><refentrytitle>make</refentrytitle><manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry> variables
      and can be set in <filename>/etc/make.conf</filename>,
      <filename>Makefile.inc</filename>, as environment variables on
      the command line, or in dot files.</para>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="the-website-build">
    <title xml:lang="en">Building and Installing the Web Pages</title>

    <para xml:lang="en">Having obtained the documentation and web site source files,
      the web site can be built.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en">An actual installation of the web site is run as the <systemitem class="username">root</systemitem>
      user because the permissions on the web server directory will
      not allow files to be installed by an unprivileged user.
      For testing, it can be useful to install the files as a normal
      user to a temporary directory.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en">In these examples, the web site files are built by user
      <systemitem class="username">jru</systemitem> in their home
      directory, <filename>~/doc</filename>, with a full path of
      <filename>/usr/home/jru/doc</filename>.</para>

    <tip>
      <para xml:lang="en">The web site build uses the <filename>INDEX</filename>
	from the Ports Collection and might fail if that file or
	<filename>/usr/ports</filename> is not
	present.  The simplest approach is to install the <link xlink:href="@@URL_RELPREFIX@@/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/ports.html#ports-tree">Ports
	Collection</link>.</para>
    </tip>

    <example xml:id="the-website-examples-build">
      <title xml:lang="en">Build the Full Web Site and All Documents</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">Build the web site and all documents.  The resulting files
	are left in the document tree:</para>

      <screen xml:lang="en"><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>cd ~/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/htdocs/</userinput>
<prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>make all</userinput></screen>
    </example>

    <example xml:id="the-website-examples-buildinstall-englishonly">
      <title xml:lang="en">Build Only the Web Site in English</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">Build the web site only, in English, as user
	<systemitem class="username">jru</systemitem>, and install
	the resulting files into <filename>/tmp/www</filename> for
	testing:</para>

      <screen xml:lang="en"><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>cd ~/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/htdocs/</userinput>
<prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>env DESTDIR=/tmp/www make ENGLISH_ONLY=yes WEB_ONLY=yes all install</userinput></screen>

      <para xml:lang="en">Changes to static files can usually be tested by viewing
	the modified files directly with a web browser.  If the site
	has been built as shown above, a modified main page can be
	viewed with:</para>

      <screen xml:lang="en"><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>firefox /tmp/www/data/index.html</userinput></screen>

      <para xml:lang="en">Modifications to dynamic files can be tested with a web
	server running on the local system.  After building the site
	as shown above, this
	<filename>/usr/local/etc/apache24/httpd.conf</filename> can be
	used with <package>www/apache24</package>:</para>

      <programlisting xml:lang="en"># httpd.conf for testing the FreeBSD website
Define TestRoot "/tmp/www/data"

# directory for configuration files
ServerRoot "/usr/local"

Listen 80

# minimum required modules
LoadModule authz_core_module libexec/apache24/mod_authz_core.so
LoadModule mime_module libexec/apache24/mod_mime.so
LoadModule unixd_module libexec/apache24/mod_unixd.so
LoadModule cgi_module libexec/apache24/mod_cgi.so
LoadModule dir_module libexec/apache24/mod_dir.so

# run the webserver as user and group
User www
Group www

ServerAdmin you@example.com
ServerName fbsdtest

# deny access to all files
&lt;Directory /&gt;
    AllowOverride none
    Require all denied
&lt;/Directory&gt;

# allow access to the website directory
DocumentRoot "${TestRoot}"
&lt;Directory "${TestRoot}"&gt;
    Options Indexes FollowSymLinks
    AllowOverride None
    Require all granted
&lt;/Directory&gt;

# prevent access to .htaccess and .htpasswd files
&lt;Files ".ht*"&gt;
    Require all denied
&lt;/Files&gt;

ErrorLog "/var/log/httpd-error.log"
LogLevel warn

# set up the CGI script directory
&lt;Directory "${TestRoot}/cgi"&gt;
    AllowOverride None
    Options None
    Require all granted
    Options +ExecCGI
    AddHandler cgi-script .cgi
&lt;/Directory&gt;

Include etc/apache24/Includes/*.conf</programlisting>

      <para xml:lang="en">Start the web server with</para>

      <screen xml:lang="en"><prompt>#</prompt> <userinput>service apache24 onestart</userinput></screen>

      <para xml:lang="en">The	web site can be viewed at
	<link xlink:href="http://localhost"/>.  Be aware that many
	links refer to the real FreeBSD site by name, and those links
	will still go to the external site instead of the local test
	version.  Fully testing the local site will require
	temporarily setting <acronym>DNS</acronym> so
	<literal>www.FreeBSD.org</literal> resolves to
	<literal>localhost</literal> or the local
	<acronym>IP</acronym> address.</para>
    </example>

    <example xml:id="the-website-examples-buildinstall">
      <title xml:lang="en">Build and Install the Web Site</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">Build the web site and all documents as user
	<systemitem class="username">jru</systemitem>.  Install the
	resulting files as
	<systemitem class="username">root</systemitem> into the
	default directory,
	<filename>/root/public_html</filename>:</para>

      <screen xml:lang="en"><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>cd ~/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/htdocs</userinput>
<prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>make all</userinput>
<prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>su -</userinput>
Password:
<prompt>#</prompt> <userinput>cd /usr/home/jru/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/htdocs</userinput>
<prompt>#</prompt> <userinput>make install</userinput></screen>
    </example>

    <para xml:lang="en">The install process does not delete any old or outdated
      files that existed previously in the same directory.  If a new
      copy of the site is built and installed every day, this command
      will find and delete all files that have not been updated in
      three days:</para>

    <screen xml:lang="en"><prompt>#</prompt> <userinput>find <replaceable>/usr/local/www</replaceable> -ctime 3 -delete</userinput></screen>
  </sect1>
</chapter>

  
<!-- Copyright (c) 1998, 1999 Nik Clayton, All rights reserved.

     Redistribution and use in source (SGML DocBook) and 'compiled' forms
     (SGML, HTML, PDF, PostScript, RTF and so forth) with or without
     modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
     are met:

      1. Redistributions of source code (SGML DocBook) must retain the above
         copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
         disclaimer as the first lines of this file unmodified.

      2. Redistributions in compiled form (transformed to other DTDs,
         converted to PDF, PostScript, RTF and other formats) must reproduce
         the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
         following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
         provided with the distribution.

     THIS DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED BY NIK CLAYTON "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR
     IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
     OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
     DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL NIK CLAYTON BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
     INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
     (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
     SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
     HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
     STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
     ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
     POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

     $FreeBSD$
-->
<chapter version="5.0" xml:id="xml-primer">
  <title xml:lang="en">XML Primer</title>

  <para xml:lang="en">Most <acronym>FDP</acronym> documentation is written with
    markup languages based on <acronym>XML</acronym>.  This chapter
    explains what that means, how to read and understand the
    documentation source, and the <acronym>XML</acronym> techniques
    used.</para>

  <para xml:lang="en">Portions of this section were inspired by Mark Galassi's
    <link xlink:href="http://www.galassi.org/mark/mydocs/docbook-intro/docbook-intro.html">Get
      Going With DocBook</link>.</para>

  <sect1 xml:id="xml-primer-overview">
    <title>概論</title>

    <para xml:lang="en">In the original days of computers, electronic text was
      simple.  There were a few character sets like
      <acronym>ASCII</acronym> or <acronym>EBCDIC</acronym>, but that
      was about it.  Text was text, and what you saw really was what
      you got.  No frills, no formatting, no intelligence.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en">Inevitably, this was not enough.  When text is in a
      machine-usable format, machines are expected to be able to use
      and manipulate it intelligently.  Authors want to indicate that
      certain phrases should be emphasized, or added to a glossary, or
      made into hyperlinks.  Filenames could be shown in a
      <quote>typewriter</quote> style font for viewing on screen, but
      as <quote>italics</quote> when printed, or any of a myriad of
      other options for presentation.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en">It was once hoped that Artificial Intelligence (AI) would
      make this easy.  The computer would read the document and
      automatically identify key phrases, filenames, text that the
      reader should type in, examples, and more.  Unfortunately, real
      life has not happened quite like that, and computers still
      require assistance before they can meaningfully process
      text.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en">More precisely, they need help identifying what is what.
      Consider this text:</para>

    <blockquote>
      <para xml:lang="en">To remove <filename>/tmp/foo</filename>, use
	<citerefentry><refentrytitle>rm</refentrytitle><manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry>.</para>

      <screen xml:lang="en"><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>rm /tmp/foo</userinput></screen>
    </blockquote>

    <para xml:lang="en">It is easy to see which parts are filenames, which are
      commands to be typed in, which parts are references to manual
      pages, and so on.  But the computer processing the document
      cannot.  For this we need markup.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en"><quote>Markup</quote> is commonly used to describe
      <quote>adding value</quote> or <quote>increasing cost</quote>.
      The term takes on both these meanings when applied to text.
      Markup is additional text included in the document,
      distinguished from the document's content in some way, so that
      programs that process the document can read the markup and use
      it when making decisions about the document.  Editors can hide
      the markup from the user, so the user is not distracted by
      it.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en">The extra information stored in the markup
      <emphasis>adds value</emphasis> to the document.  Adding the
      markup to the document must typically be done by a
      person—after all, if computers could recognize the text
      sufficiently well to add the markup then there would be no need
      to add it in the first place.  This
      <emphasis>increases the cost</emphasis> (the effort required) to
      create the document.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en">The previous example is actually represented in this
      document like this:</para>

    <programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">para</tag>To remove <tag class="starttag">filename</tag>/tmp/foo<tag class="endtag">filename</tag>, use &amp;man.rm.1;.<tag class="endtag">para</tag>

<tag class="starttag">screen</tag>&amp;prompt.user; <tag class="starttag">userinput</tag>rm /tmp/foo<tag class="endtag">userinput</tag><tag class="endtag">screen</tag></programlisting>

    <para xml:lang="en">The markup is clearly separate from the content.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en">Markup languages define what the markup means and how it
      should be interpreted.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en">Of course, one markup language might not be enough.  A
      markup language for technical documentation has very different
      requirements than a markup language that is intended for cookery
      recipes.  This, in turn, would be very different from a markup
      language used to describe poetry.  What is really needed is a
      first language used to write these other markup languages.  A
      <emphasis>meta markup language</emphasis>.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en">This is exactly what the eXtensible Markup
      Language (<acronym>XML</acronym>) is.  Many markup languages
      have been written in <acronym>XML</acronym>, including the two
      most used by the <acronym>FDP</acronym>,
      <acronym>XHTML</acronym> and DocBook.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en">Each language definition is more properly called a grammar,
      vocabulary, schema or Document Type Definition
      (<acronym>DTD</acronym>).  There are various languages to
      specify an <acronym>XML</acronym> grammar, or
      <emphasis>schema</emphasis>.</para>

    <para xml:id="xml-primer-validating" xml:lang="en">A schema is a
      <emphasis>complete</emphasis> specification of all the elements
      that are allowed to appear, the order in which they should
      appear, which elements are mandatory, which are optional, and so
      forth.  This makes it possible to write an
      <acronym>XML</acronym> <emphasis>parser</emphasis> which reads
      in both the schema and a document which claims to conform to the
      schema.  The parser can then confirm whether or not all the
      elements required by the vocabulary are in the document in the
      right order, and whether there are any errors in the markup.
      This is normally referred to as
      <quote>validating the document</quote>.</para>

    <note>
      <para xml:lang="en">Validation confirms that the choice of
	elements, their ordering, and so on, conforms to that listed
	in the grammar.  It does <emphasis>not</emphasis> check
	whether <emphasis>appropriate</emphasis> markup has been used
	for the content.  If all the filenames in a document were
	marked up as function names, the parser would not flag this as
	an error (assuming, of course, that the schema defines
	elements for filenames and functions, and that they are
	allowed to appear in the same place).</para>
    </note>

    <para xml:lang="en">Most contributions to the Documentation
      Project will be content marked up in either
      <acronym>XHTML</acronym> or DocBook, rather than alterations to
      the schemas.  For this reason, this book will not touch on how
      to write a vocabulary.</para>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="xml-primer-elements">
    <title xml:lang="en">Elements, Tags, and Attributes</title>

    <para xml:lang="en">All the vocabularies written in <acronym>XML</acronym> share
      certain characteristics.  This is hardly surprising, as the
      philosophy behind <acronym>XML</acronym> will inevitably show
      through.  One of the most obvious manifestations of this
      philosophy is that of <emphasis>content</emphasis> and
      <emphasis>elements</emphasis>.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en">Documentation, whether it is a single web page, or a lengthy
      book, is considered to consist of content.  This content is then
      divided and further subdivided into elements.  The purpose of
      adding markup is to name and identify the boundaries of these
      elements for further processing.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en">For example, consider a typical book.  At the very top
      level, the book is itself an element.  This <quote>book</quote>
      element obviously contains chapters, which can be considered to
      be elements in their own right.  Each chapter will contain more
      elements, such as paragraphs, quotations, and footnotes.  Each
      paragraph might contain further elements, identifying content
      that was direct speech, or the name of a character in the
      story.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en">It may be helpful to think of this as
      <quote>chunking</quote> content.  At the very top level is one
      chunk, the book.  Look a little deeper, and there are more
      chunks, the individual chapters.  These are chunked further into
      paragraphs, footnotes, character names, and so on.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en">Notice how this differentiation between different elements
      of the content can be made without resorting to any
      <acronym>XML</acronym> terms.  It really is surprisingly
      straightforward.  This could be done with a highlighter pen and
      a printout of the book, using different colors to indicate
      different chunks of content.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en">Of course, we do not have an electronic highlighter pen, so
      we need some other way of indicating which element each piece of
      content belongs to.  In languages written in
      <acronym>XML</acronym> (<acronym>XHTML</acronym>, DocBook, et
      al) this is done by means of <emphasis>tags</emphasis>.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en">A tag is used to identify where a particular element starts,
      and where the element ends.  <emphasis>The tag is not part of
      the element itself</emphasis>.  Because each grammar was
      normally written to mark up specific types of information, each
      one will recognize different elements, and will therefore have
      different names for the tags.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en">For an element called
      <replaceable>element-name</replaceable> the start tag will
      normally look like <tag class="starttag"><replaceable>element-name</replaceable></tag>.
      The corresponding closing tag for this element is <tag class="endtag"><replaceable>element-name</replaceable></tag>.</para>

    <example>
      <title xml:lang="en">Using an Element (Start and End Tags)</title>

      <para xml:lang="en"><acronym>XHTML</acronym> has an element for indicating
	that the content enclosed by the element is a paragraph,
	called <tag>p</tag>.</para>

      <programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">p</tag>This is a paragraph.  It starts with the start tag for
  the 'p' element, and it will end with the end tag for the 'p'
  element.<tag class="endtag">p</tag>

<tag class="starttag">p</tag>This is another paragraph.  But this one is much shorter.<tag class="endtag">p</tag></programlisting>
    </example>

    <para xml:lang="en">Some elements have no content.  For example, in
      <acronym>XHTML</acronym>, a horizontal line can be included in
      the document.  For these <quote>empty</quote> elements,
      <acronym>XML</acronym> introduced a shorthand form that is
      completely equivalent to the two-tag version:</para>

    <example>
      <title xml:lang="en">Using an Element Without Content</title>

      <para xml:lang="en"><acronym>XHTML</acronym> has an element for indicating a
	horizontal rule, called <tag>hr</tag>.  This element
	does not wrap content, so it looks like this:</para>

      <programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">p</tag>One paragraph.<tag class="endtag">p</tag>
<tag class="starttag">hr</tag><tag class="endtag">hr</tag>

<tag class="starttag">p</tag>This is another paragraph.  A horizontal rule separates this
  from the previous paragraph.<tag class="endtag">p</tag></programlisting>

      <para xml:lang="en">The shorthand version consists of a single tag:</para>

      <programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">p</tag>One paragraph.<tag class="endtag">p</tag>
<tag class="emptytag">hr</tag>

<tag class="starttag">p</tag>This is another paragraph.  A horizontal rule separates this
  from the previous paragraph.<tag class="endtag">p</tag></programlisting>
    </example>

    <para xml:lang="en">As shown above, elements can contain other elements.  In the
      book example earlier, the book element contained all the chapter
      elements, which in turn contained all the paragraph elements,
      and so on.</para>

    <example>
      <title xml:lang="en">Elements Within Elements; <tag>em</tag></title>

      <programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">p</tag>This is a simple <tag class="starttag">em</tag>paragraph<tag class="endtag">em</tag> where some
  of the <tag class="starttag">em</tag>words<tag class="endtag">em</tag> have been <tag class="starttag">em</tag>emphasized<tag class="endtag">em</tag>.<tag class="endtag">p</tag></programlisting>
    </example>

    <para xml:lang="en">The grammar consists of rules that describe which elements
      can contain other elements, and exactly what they can
      contain.</para>

    <important>
      <para xml:lang="en">People often confuse the terms tags and elements, and use
	the terms as if they were interchangeable.  They are
	not.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">An element is a conceptual part of your document.  An
	element has a defined start and end.  The tags mark where the
	element starts and ends.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">When this document (or anyone else knowledgeable about
	<acronym>XML</acronym>) refers to
	<quote>the <tag class="starttag">p</tag> tag</quote>
	they mean the literal text consisting of the three characters
	<literal>&lt;</literal>, <literal>p</literal>, and
	<literal>&gt;</literal>.  But the phrase
	<quote>the <tag>p</tag> element</quote> refers to the
	whole element.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">This distinction <emphasis>is</emphasis> very subtle.  But
	keep it in mind.</para>
    </important>

    <para xml:lang="en">Elements can have attributes.  An attribute has a name and a
      value, and is used for adding extra information to the element.
      This might be information that indicates how the content should
      be rendered, or might be something that uniquely identifies that
      occurrence of the element, or it might be something else.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en">An element's attributes are written
      <emphasis>inside</emphasis> the start tag for that element, and
      take the form
      <literal><replaceable>attribute-name</replaceable>="<replaceable>attribute-value</replaceable>"</literal>.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en">In <acronym>XHTML</acronym>, the <tag>p</tag>
      element has an attribute called
      <tag class="attribute">align</tag>, which suggests an
      alignment (justification) for the paragraph to the program
      displaying the <acronym>XHTML</acronym>.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en">The <tag class="attribute">align</tag> attribute can
      take one of four defined values, <literal>left</literal>,
      <literal>center</literal>, <literal>right</literal> and
      <literal>justify</literal>.  If the attribute is not specified
      then the default is <literal>left</literal>.</para>

    <example>
      <title xml:lang="en">Using an Element with an Attribute</title>

      <programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">p align="left"</tag>The inclusion of the align attribute
  on this paragraph was superfluous, since the default is left.<tag class="endtag">p</tag>

<tag class="starttag">p align="center"</tag>This may appear in the center.<tag class="endtag">p</tag></programlisting>
    </example>

    <para xml:lang="en">Some attributes only take specific values, such as
      <literal>left</literal> or <literal>justify</literal>.  Others
      allow any value.</para>

    <example>
      <title xml:lang="en">Single Quotes Around Attributes</title>

      <programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">p align='right'</tag>I am on the right!<tag class="endtag">p</tag></programlisting>
    </example>

    <para xml:lang="en">Attribute values in <acronym>XML</acronym> must be enclosed
      in either single or double quotes.  Double quotes are
      traditional.  Single quotes are useful when the attribute value
      contains double quotes.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en">Information about attributes, elements, and tags is stored
      in catalog files.  The Documentation Project uses standard
      DocBook catalogs and includes additional catalogs for
      FreeBSD-specific features.  Paths to the catalog files are defined
      in an environment variable so they can be found by the document
      build tools.</para>

    <sect2>
      <title xml:lang="en">To Do…</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">Before running the examples in this document, install
	    <package>textproc/docproj</package> from
	    the FreeBSD Ports Collection.  This is a
	    <emphasis>meta-port</emphasis> that downloads and installs
	    the standard programs and supporting files needed by the
	    Documentation Project.  <citerefentry><refentrytitle>csh</refentrytitle><manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry> users must use
	    <command>rehash</command> for the shell to recognize new
	    programs after they have been installed, or log out
	    and then log back in again.</para>

      <procedure>
	<step>
	  <para xml:lang="en">Create <filename>example.xml</filename>, and enter
	    this text:</para>

	  <programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd"</tag>

<tag class="starttag">html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"</tag>
  <tag class="starttag">head</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">title</tag>An Example XHTML File<tag class="endtag">title</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">head</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">body</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">p</tag>This is a paragraph containing some text.<tag class="endtag">p</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">p</tag>This paragraph contains some more text.<tag class="endtag">p</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">p align="right"</tag>This paragraph might be right-justified.<tag class="endtag">p</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">body</tag>
<tag class="endtag">html</tag></programlisting>
	</step>

	<step>
	  <para xml:lang="en">Try to validate this file using an
	    <acronym>XML</acronym> parser.</para>

	  <para xml:lang="en"><package>textproc/docproj</package>
	    includes the <command>xmllint</command>
	    <link linkend="xml-primer-validating">validating
	      parser</link>.</para>

	  <para xml:lang="en">Use <command>xmllint</command> to validate the
	    document:</para>

	  <screen xml:lang="en"><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>xmllint --valid --noout example.xml</userinput></screen>

	  <para xml:lang="en"><command>xmllint</command> returns without displaying
	    any output, showing that the document validated
	    successfully.</para>
	</step>

	<step>
	  <para xml:lang="en">See what happens when required elements are omitted.
	    Delete the line with the
	    <tag class="starttag">title</tag> and
	    <tag class="endtag">title</tag> tags, and re-run
	    the validation.</para>

	  <screen xml:lang="en"><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>xmllint --valid --noout example.xml</userinput>
example.xml:5: element head: validity error : Element head content does not follow the DTD, expecting ((script | style | meta | link | object | isindex)* , ((title , (script | style | meta | link | object | isindex)* , (base , (script | style | meta | link | object | isindex)*)?) | (base , (script | style | meta | link | object | isindex)* , title , (script | style | meta | link | object | isindex)*))), got ()</screen>

	  <para xml:lang="en">This shows that the validation error comes from the
	    <replaceable>fifth</replaceable> line of the
	    <replaceable>example.xml</replaceable> file and that the
	    content of the <tag class="starttag">head</tag> is
	    the part which does not follow the rules of the
	    <acronym>XHTML</acronym> grammar.</para>

	  <para xml:lang="en">Then <command>xmllint</command> shows the line where
	    the error was found and marks the exact character position
	    with a <literal>^</literal> sign.</para>
	</step>

	<step>
	  <para xml:lang="en">Replace the <tag>title</tag> element.</para>
	</step>
      </procedure>
    </sect2>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="xml-primer-doctype-declaration">
    <title xml:lang="en">The DOCTYPE Declaration</title>

    <para xml:lang="en">The beginning of each document can specify the name of the
      <acronym>DTD</acronym> to which the document conforms.  This
      DOCTYPE declaration is used by <acronym>XML</acronym> parsers to
      identify the <acronym>DTD</acronym> and ensure that the document
      does conform to it.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en">A typical declaration for a document written to conform with
      version 1.0 of the <acronym>XHTML</acronym>
      <acronym>DTD</acronym> looks like this:</para>

    <programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd"</tag></programlisting>

    <para xml:lang="en">That line contains a number of different components.</para>

    <variablelist>
      <varlistentry>
	<term xml:lang="en"><literal>&lt;!</literal></term>

	<listitem>
	  <para xml:lang="en">The <emphasis>indicator</emphasis> shows
	    this is an <acronym>XML</acronym> declaration.</para>
	</listitem>
      </varlistentry>

      <varlistentry>
	<term xml:lang="en"><literal>DOCTYPE</literal></term>

	<listitem>
	  <para xml:lang="en">Shows that this is an <acronym>XML</acronym>
	    declaration of the document type.</para>
	</listitem>
      </varlistentry>

      <varlistentry>
	<term xml:lang="en"><literal>html</literal></term>

	<listitem>
	  <para xml:lang="en">Names the first
	    <link linkend="xml-primer-elements">element</link> that
	    will appear in the document.</para>
	</listitem>
      </varlistentry>

      <varlistentry>
	<term xml:lang="en"><literal>PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN"</literal></term>

	<listitem>
	  <para xml:lang="en">Lists the Formal Public Identifier
	    (<acronym>FPI</acronym>)
	    <indexterm xml:lang="en">
	      <primary>Formal Public Identifier</primary>
	    </indexterm>
	    for the <acronym>DTD</acronym> to which this document
	    conforms.  The <acronym>XML</acronym> parser uses this to
	    find the correct <acronym>DTD</acronym> when processing
	    this document.</para>

	  <para xml:lang="en"><literal>PUBLIC</literal> is not a part of the
	    <acronym>FPI</acronym>, but indicates to the
	    <acronym>XML</acronym> processor how to find the
	    <acronym>DTD</acronym> referenced in the
	    <acronym>FPI</acronym>.  Other ways of telling the
	    <acronym>XML</acronym> parser how to find the
	    <acronym>DTD</acronym> are shown <link linkend="xml-primer-fpi-alternatives">later</link>.</para>
	</listitem>
      </varlistentry>

      <varlistentry>
	<term xml:lang="en"><literal>"http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd"</literal></term>

	<listitem>
	  <para xml:lang="en">A local filename or a <acronym>URL</acronym> to find
	    the <acronym>DTD</acronym>.</para>
	</listitem>
      </varlistentry>

      <varlistentry>
	<term xml:lang="en"><literal>&gt;</literal></term>

	<listitem>
	  <para xml:lang="en">Ends the declaration and returns to the
	    document.</para>
	</listitem>
      </varlistentry>
    </variablelist>

    <sect2>
      <title xml:lang="en">Formal Public Identifiers
	(<acronym>FPI</acronym>s)</title>

      <indexterm significance="preferred" xml:lang="en">
	<primary>Formal Public Identifier</primary>
      </indexterm>

      <note>
	<para xml:lang="en">It is not necessary to know this, but it is useful
	  background, and might help debug problems when the
	  <acronym>XML</acronym> processor can not locate the
	  <acronym>DTD</acronym>.</para>
      </note>

      <para xml:lang="en"><acronym>FPI</acronym>s must follow a specific
	syntax:</para>

      <programlisting xml:lang="en">"<replaceable>Owner</replaceable>//<replaceable>Keyword</replaceable> <replaceable>Description</replaceable>//<replaceable>Language</replaceable>"</programlisting>

      <variablelist>
	<varlistentry>
	  <term xml:lang="en"><replaceable>Owner</replaceable></term>

	  <listitem>
	    <para xml:lang="en">The owner of the <acronym>FPI</acronym>.</para>

	    <para xml:lang="en">The beginning of the string identifies the owner of
	      the <acronym>FPI</acronym>.  For example, the
	      <acronym>FPI</acronym>
	      <literal>"ISO 8879:1986//ENTITIES Greek
		Symbols//EN"</literal> lists
	      <literal>ISO 8879:1986</literal> as being the owner for
	      the set of entities for Greek symbols.
	      <acronym>ISO</acronym> 8879:1986 is the International
	      Organization for Standardization
	      (<acronym>ISO</acronym>) number for the
	      <acronym>SGML</acronym> standard, the predecessor (and a
	      superset) of <acronym>XML</acronym>.</para>

	    <para xml:lang="en">Otherwise, this string will either look like
	      <literal>-//<replaceable>Owner</replaceable></literal>
	      or
	      <literal>+//<replaceable>Owner</replaceable></literal>
	      (notice the only difference is the leading
	      <literal>+</literal> or <literal>-</literal>).</para>

	    <para xml:lang="en">If the string starts with <literal>-</literal> then
	      the owner information is unregistered, with a
	      <literal>+</literal> identifying it as
	      registered.</para>

	    <para xml:lang="en"><acronym>ISO</acronym> 9070:1991 defines how
	      registered names are generated.  It might be derived
	      from the number of an <acronym>ISO</acronym>
	      publication, an <acronym>ISBN</acronym> code, or an
	      organization code assigned according to
	      <acronym>ISO</acronym> 6523.  Additionally, a
	      registration authority could be created in order to
	      assign registered names.  The <acronym>ISO</acronym>
	      council delegated this to the American National
	      Standards Institute (<acronym>ANSI</acronym>).</para>

	    <para xml:lang="en">Because the FreeBSD Project has not been registered,
	      the owner string is <literal>-//FreeBSD</literal>.  As seen
	      in the example, the <acronym>W3C</acronym> are not a
	      registered owner either.</para>
	  </listitem>
	</varlistentry>

	<varlistentry>
	  <term xml:lang="en"><replaceable>Keyword</replaceable></term>

	  <listitem>
	    <para xml:lang="en">There are several keywords that indicate the type of
	      information in the file.  Some of the most common
	      keywords are <literal>DTD</literal>,
	      <literal>ELEMENT</literal>, <literal>ENTITIES</literal>,
	      and <literal>TEXT</literal>.  <literal>DTD</literal> is
	      used only for <acronym>DTD</acronym> files,
	      <literal>ELEMENT</literal> is usually used for
	      <acronym>DTD</acronym> fragments that contain only
	      entity or element declarations.  <literal>TEXT</literal>
	      is used for <acronym>XML</acronym> content (text and
	      tags).</para>
	  </listitem>
	</varlistentry>

	<varlistentry>
	  <term xml:lang="en"><replaceable>Description</replaceable></term>

	  <listitem>
	    <para xml:lang="en">Any description can be given for the contents
	      of this file.  This may include version numbers or any
	      short text that is meaningful and unique for the
	      <acronym>XML</acronym> system.</para>
	  </listitem>
	</varlistentry>

	<varlistentry>
	  <term xml:lang="en"><replaceable>Language</replaceable></term>

	  <listitem>
	    <para xml:lang="en">An <acronym>ISO</acronym> two-character code that
	      identifies the native language for the file.
	      <literal>EN</literal> is used for English.</para>
	  </listitem>
	</varlistentry>
      </variablelist>

      <sect3>
	<title xml:lang="en"><filename>catalog</filename> Files</title>

	<para xml:lang="en">With the syntax above, an <acronym>XML</acronym>
	  processor needs to have some way of turning the
	  <acronym>FPI</acronym> into the name of the file containing
	  the <acronym>DTD</acronym>.  A catalog file (typically
	  called <filename>catalog</filename>) contains lines that map
	  <acronym>FPI</acronym>s to filenames.  For example, if the
	  catalog file contained the line:</para>

<!-- XXX: mention XML catalog or maybe replace this totally and only cover XML catalog -->

	<programlisting xml:lang="en">PUBLIC  "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN"             "1.0/transitional.dtd"</programlisting>

	<para xml:lang="en">The <acronym>XML</acronym> processor knows that the
	  <acronym>DTD</acronym> is called
	  <filename>transitional.dtd</filename> in the
	  <filename>1.0</filename> subdirectory of the directory that
	  held <filename>catalog</filename>.</para>

	<para xml:lang="en">Examine the contents of
	  <filename>/usr/local/share/xml/dtd/xhtml/catalog.xml</filename>.
	  This is the catalog file for the <acronym>XHTML</acronym>
	  <acronym>DTD</acronym>s that were installed as part of the
	  <package>textproc/docproj</package> port.</para>
      </sect3>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="xml-primer-fpi-alternatives">
      <title xml:lang="en">Alternatives to <acronym>FPI</acronym>s</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">Instead of using an <acronym>FPI</acronym> to indicate the
	<acronym>DTD</acronym> to which the document conforms (and
	therefore, which file on the system contains the
	<acronym>DTD</acronym>), the filename can be explicitly
	specified.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">The syntax is slightly different:</para>

      <programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">!DOCTYPE html SYSTEM "/path/to/file.dtd"</tag></programlisting>

      <para xml:lang="en">The <literal>SYSTEM</literal> keyword indicates that the
	<acronym>XML</acronym> processor should locate the
	<acronym>DTD</acronym> in a system specific fashion.  This
	typically (but not always) means the <acronym>DTD</acronym>
	will be provided as a filename.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">Using <acronym>FPI</acronym>s is preferred for reasons of
	portability.  If the <literal>SYSTEM</literal> identifier is
	used, then the <acronym>DTD</acronym> must be provided and
	kept in the same location for everyone.</para>
    </sect2>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="xml-primer-xml-escape">
    <title xml:lang="en">Escaping Back to <acronym>XML</acronym></title>

    <para xml:lang="en">Some of the underlying <acronym>XML</acronym> syntax can be
      useful within documents.  For example, comments can be included
      in the document, and will be ignored by the parser.  Comments
      are entered using <acronym>XML</acronym> syntax.  Other uses for
      <acronym>XML</acronym> syntax will be shown later.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en"><acronym>XML</acronym> sections begin with a
      <literal>&lt;!</literal> tag and end with a
      <literal>&gt;</literal>.  These sections contain instructions
      for the parser rather than elements of the document.  Everything
      between these tags is <acronym>XML</acronym> syntax.  The
      <link linkend="xml-primer-doctype-declaration">DOCTYPE
	declaration</link> shown earlier is an example of
      <acronym>XML</acronym> syntax included in the document.</para>

  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="xml-primer-comments">
    <title xml:lang="en">Comments</title>

    <para xml:lang="en">Comments are an <acronym>XML</acronym> construct, and are
      normally only valid inside a <acronym>DTD</acronym>.  However,
      as <xref linkend="xml-primer-xml-escape"/> shows, it is possible
      to use <acronym>XML</acronym> syntax within the document.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en">The delimiter for XML comments is the string
      <quote><literal>--</literal></quote>.  The first occurrence of
      this string opens a comment, and the second closes it.</para>

    <example>
      <title xml:lang="en"><acronym>XML</acronym> Generic Comment</title>

      <programlisting xml:lang="en">&lt;!-- This is inside the comment --&gt;

&lt;!-- This is another comment    --&gt;

&lt;!-- This is one way
     of doing multiline comments --&gt;

&lt;!-- This is another way of   --
  -- doing multiline comments --&gt;</programlisting>
    </example>

    <para xml:lang="en"><acronym>XHTML</acronym> users may be familiar with different
      rules for comments.  In particular, it is often believed that
      the string <literal>&lt;!--</literal> opens a comment, and it is
      only closed by <literal>--&gt;</literal>.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en">This is <emphasis>not</emphasis> correct.  Many web browsers
      have broken <acronym>XHTML</acronym> parsers, and will accept
      incorrect input as valid.  However, the <acronym>XML</acronym>
      parsers used by the Documentation Project are more strict, and
      will reject documents with that error.</para>

    <example>
      <title xml:lang="en">Erroneous <acronym>XML</acronym> Comments</title>

      <programlisting xml:lang="en">&lt;!-- This is in the comment --

     THIS IS OUTSIDE THE COMMENT!

  -- back inside the comment --&gt;</programlisting>

      <para xml:lang="en">The <acronym>XML</acronym> parser will treat this as
	though it were actually:</para>

      <programlisting xml:lang="en">&lt;!THIS IS OUTSIDE THE COMMENT&gt;</programlisting>

      <para xml:lang="en">That is not valid <acronym>XML</acronym>, and may give
	confusing error messages.</para>
    </example>

    <sect2>
      <title xml:lang="en">To Do…</title>

      <procedure>
	<step>
	  <para xml:lang="en">Add some comments to
	    <filename>example.xml</filename>, and check that the file
	    still validates using <command>xmllint</command>.</para>
	</step>

	<step>
	  <para xml:lang="en">Add some invalid comments to
	    <filename>example.xml</filename>, and see the error
	    messages that <command>xmllint</command> gives when it
	    encounters an invalid comment.</para>
	</step>
      </procedure>
    </sect2>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="xml-primer-entities">
    <title xml:lang="en">Entities</title>

    <para xml:lang="en">Entities are a mechanism for assigning names to chunks of
      content.  As an <acronym>XML</acronym> parser processes a
      document, any entities it finds are replaced by the content of
      the entity.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en">This is a good way to have re-usable, easily changeable
      chunks of content in <acronym>XML</acronym> documents.  It is
      also the only way to include one marked up file inside another
      using <acronym>XML</acronym>.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en">There are two types of entities for two different
      situations: <emphasis>general entities</emphasis> and
      <emphasis>parameter entities</emphasis>.</para>

    <sect2 xml:id="xml-primer-general-entities">
      <title xml:lang="en">General Entities</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">General entities are used to assign names to reusable
	chunks of text.  These entities can only be used in the
	document.  They cannot be used in an
	<acronym>XML</acronym> context.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">To include the text of a general entity in the document,
	include
	<literal>&amp;<replaceable>entity-name</replaceable>;</literal>
	in the text.  For example, consider a general entity called
	<literal>current.version</literal> which expands to the
	current version number of a product.  To use it in the
	document, write:</para>

      <programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">para</tag>The current version of our product is
  &amp;current.version;.<tag class="endtag">para</tag></programlisting>

      <para xml:lang="en">When the version number changes, edit the definition of
	the general entity, replacing the value.  Then reprocess the
	document.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">General entities can also be used to enter characters that
	could not otherwise be included in an <acronym>XML</acronym>
	document.  For example, <literal>&lt;</literal> and
	<literal>&amp;</literal> cannot normally appear in an
	<acronym>XML</acronym> document.  The <acronym>XML</acronym>
	parser sees the <literal>&lt;</literal> symbol as the start of
	a tag.  Likewise, when the <literal>&amp;</literal> symbol is
	seen, the next text is expected to be an entity name.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">These symbols can be included by using two predefined
	general entities: <literal>&amp;lt;</literal> and
	<literal>&amp;amp;</literal>.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">General entities can only be defined within an
	<acronym>XML</acronym> context.  Such definitions are usually
	done immediately after the DOCTYPE declaration.</para>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en">Defining General Entities</title>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en">&lt;!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN"
"http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd" [
&lt;!ENTITY current.version    "3.0-RELEASE"&gt;
&lt;!ENTITY last.version       "2.2.7-RELEASE"&gt;
]&gt;</programlisting>

	<para xml:lang="en">The DOCTYPE declaration has been extended by adding a
	  square bracket at the end of the first line.  The two
	  entities are then defined over the next two lines, the
	  square bracket is closed, and then the DOCTYPE declaration
	  is closed.</para>

	<para xml:lang="en">The square brackets are necessary to indicate that the
	  DTD indicated by the DOCTYPE declaration is being
	  extended.</para>
      </example>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="xml-primer-parameter-entities">
      <title xml:lang="en">Parameter Entities</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">Parameter entities, like
	<link linkend="xml-primer-general-entities">general
	  entities</link>, are used to assign names to reusable chunks
	of text.  But parameter entities can only be used within an
	<link linkend="xml-primer-xml-escape">XML
	  context</link>.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">Parameter entity definitions are similar to those for
	general entities.  However, parameter entries are included
	with
	<literal>%<replaceable>entity-name</replaceable>;</literal>.
	The definition also includes the <literal>%</literal> between
	the <literal>ENTITY</literal> keyword and the name of the
	entity.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">For a mnemonic, think
	<quote><emphasis>P</emphasis>arameter entities use the
	  <emphasis>P</emphasis>ercent symbol</quote>.</para>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en">Defining Parameter Entities</title>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en">&lt;!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN"
"http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd" [
&lt;!ENTITY % param.some "some"&gt;
&lt;!ENTITY % param.text "text"&gt;
&lt;!ENTITY % param.new  "%param.some more %param.text"&gt;

&lt;!-- %param.new now contains "some more text" --&gt;
]&gt;</programlisting>
      </example>
    </sect2>

    <sect2>
      <title xml:lang="en">To Do…</title>

      <procedure>
	<step>
	  <para xml:lang="en">Add a general entity to
	    <filename>example.xml</filename>.</para>

	  <programlisting xml:lang="en">&lt;!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN"
"http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd" [
&lt;!ENTITY version "1.1"&gt;
]&gt;

<tag class="starttag">html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"</tag>
  <tag class="starttag">head</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">title</tag>An Example XHTML File<tag class="endtag">title</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">head</tag>

  &lt;!-- There may be some comments in here as well --&gt;

  <tag class="starttag">body</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">p</tag>This is a paragraph containing some text.<tag class="endtag">p</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">p</tag>This paragraph contains some more text.<tag class="endtag">p</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">p align="right"</tag>This paragraph might be right-justified.<tag class="endtag">p</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">p</tag>The current version of this document is: &amp;version;<tag class="endtag">p</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">body</tag>
<tag class="endtag">html</tag></programlisting>
	</step>

	<step>
	  <para xml:lang="en">Validate the document using
	    <command>xmllint</command>.</para>
	</step>

	<step>
	  <para xml:lang="en">Load <filename>example.xml</filename> into a web
	    browser.  It may have to be copied to
	    <filename>example.html</filename> before the browser
	    recognizes it as an <acronym>XHTML</acronym>
	    document.</para>

	  <para xml:lang="en">Older browsers with simple parsers may not render this
	    file as expected.  The entity reference
	    <literal>&amp;version;</literal> may not be replaced by
	    the version number, or the <acronym>XML</acronym> context
	    closing <literal>]&gt;</literal> may not be recognized and
	    instead shown in the output.</para>
	</step>

	<step>
	  <para xml:lang="en">The solution is to <emphasis>normalize</emphasis> the
	    document with an <acronym>XML</acronym> normalizer.  The
	    normalizer reads valid <acronym>XML</acronym> and writes
	    equally valid <acronym>XML</acronym> which has been
	    transformed in some way.  One way the normalizer
	    transforms the input is by expanding all the entity
	    references in the document, replacing the entities with
	    the text that they represent.</para>

	  <para xml:lang="en"><command>xmllint</command> can be used for this.  It
	    also has an option to drop the initial
	    <acronym>DTD</acronym> section so that the closing
	    <literal>]&gt;</literal> does not confuse browsers:</para>

	  <screen xml:lang="en"><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>xmllint --noent --dropdtd example.xml &gt; example.html</userinput></screen>

	  <para xml:lang="en">A normalized copy of the document with entities
	    expanded is produced in <filename>example.html</filename>,
	    ready to load into a web browser.</para>
	</step>
      </procedure>
    </sect2>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="xml-primer-include">
    <title xml:lang="en">Using Entities to Include Files</title>

    <para xml:lang="en">Both
      <link linkend="xml-primer-general-entities">general</link> and
      <link linkend="xml-primer-parameter-entities">parameter</link>
      entities are particularly useful for including one file inside
      another.</para>

    <sect2 xml:id="xml-primer-include-using-gen-entities">
      <title xml:lang="en">Using General Entities to Include Files</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">Consider some content for an <acronym>XML</acronym> book
	organized into files, one file per chapter, called
	<filename>chapter1.xml</filename>,
	<filename>chapter2.xml</filename>, and so forth, with a
	<filename>book.xml</filename> that will contain these
	chapters.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">In order to use the contents of these files as the values
	for entities, they are declared with the
	<literal>SYSTEM</literal> keyword.  This directs the
	<acronym>XML</acronym> parser to include the contents of the
	named file as the value of the entity.</para>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en">Using General Entities to Include Files</title>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en">&lt;!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN"
"http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd" [
&lt;!ENTITY chapter.1 SYSTEM "chapter1.xml"&gt;
&lt;!ENTITY chapter.2 SYSTEM "chapter2.xml"&gt;
&lt;!ENTITY chapter.3 SYSTEM "chapter3.xml"&gt;
&lt;!-- And so forth --&gt;
]&gt;

<tag class="starttag">html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"</tag>
  &lt;!-- Use the entities to load in the chapters --&gt;

  &amp;chapter.1;
  &amp;chapter.2;
  &amp;chapter.3;
<tag class="endtag">html</tag></programlisting>
      </example>

      <warning>
	<para xml:lang="en">When using general entities to include other files
	  within a document, the files being included
	  (<filename>chapter1.xml</filename>,
	  <filename>chapter2.xml</filename>, and so on)
	  <emphasis>must not</emphasis> start with a DOCTYPE
	  declaration.  This is a syntax error because entities are
	  low-level constructs and they are resolved before any
	  parsing happens.</para>
      </warning>
    </sect2>

    <sect2>
      <title xml:lang="en">Using Parameter Entities to Include Files</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">Parameter entities can only be used inside an
	<acronym>XML</acronym> context.  Including a file in an
	<acronym>XML</acronym> context can be used
	to ensure that general entities are reusable.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">Suppose that there are many chapters in the document, and
	these chapters were reused in two different books, each book
	organizing the chapters in a different fashion.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">The entities could be listed at the top of each book, but
	that quickly becomes cumbersome to manage.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">Instead, place the general entity definitions inside one
	file, and use a parameter entity to include that file within
	the document.</para>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en">Using Parameter Entities to Include Files</title>

	<para xml:lang="en">Place the entity definitions in a separate file
	  called <filename>chapters.ent</filename> and
	  containing this text:</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en">&lt;!ENTITY chapter.1 SYSTEM "chapter1.xml"&gt;
&lt;!ENTITY chapter.2 SYSTEM "chapter2.xml"&gt;
&lt;!ENTITY chapter.3 SYSTEM "chapter3.xml"&gt;</programlisting>

	<para xml:lang="en">Create a parameter entity to refer to the contents
	  of the file.  Then use the parameter entity to load the file
	  into the document, which will then make all the general
	  entities available for use.  Then use the general entities
	  as before:</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en">&lt;!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN"
"http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd" [
&lt;!-- Define a parameter entity to load in the chapter general entities --&gt;
&lt;!ENTITY % chapters SYSTEM "chapters.ent"&gt;

&lt;!-- Now use the parameter entity to load in this file --&gt;
%chapters;
]&gt;

<tag class="starttag">html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"</tag>
  &amp;chapter.1;
  &amp;chapter.2;
  &amp;chapter.3;
<tag class="endtag">html</tag></programlisting>
      </example>
    </sect2>

    <sect2>
      <title xml:lang="en">To Do…</title>

      <sect3>
	<title xml:lang="en">Use General Entities to Include Files</title>

	<procedure>
	  <step>
	    <para xml:lang="en">Create three files, <filename>para1.xml</filename>,
	      <filename>para2.xml</filename>, and
	      <filename>para3.xml</filename>.</para>

	    <para xml:lang="en">Put content like this in each file:</para>

	    <programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">p</tag>This is the first paragraph.<tag class="endtag">p</tag></programlisting>
	  </step>

	  <step>
	    <para xml:lang="en">Edit <filename>example.xml</filename> so that it
	      looks like this:</para>

	    <programlisting xml:lang="en">&lt;!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN"
"http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd" [
&lt;!ENTITY version "1.1"&gt;
&lt;!ENTITY para1 SYSTEM "para1.xml"&gt;
&lt;!ENTITY para2 SYSTEM "para2.xml"&gt;
&lt;!ENTITY para3 SYSTEM "para3.xml"&gt;
]&gt;

<tag class="starttag">html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"</tag>
  <tag class="starttag">head</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">title</tag>An Example XHTML File<tag class="endtag">title</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">head</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">body</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">p</tag>The current version of this document is: &amp;version;<tag class="endtag">p</tag>

    &amp;para1;
    &amp;para2;
    &amp;para3;
  <tag class="endtag">body</tag>
<tag class="endtag">html</tag></programlisting>
	  </step>

	  <step>
	    <para xml:lang="en">Produce <filename>example.html</filename> by
	      normalizing <filename>example.xml</filename>.</para>

	    <screen xml:lang="en"><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>xmllint --dropdtd --noent example.xml &gt; example.html</userinput></screen>
	  </step>

	  <step>
	    <para xml:lang="en">Load <filename>example.html</filename> into the web
	      browser and confirm that the
	      <filename>para<replaceable>n</replaceable>.xml</filename>
	      files have been included in
	      <filename>example.html</filename>.</para>
	  </step>
	</procedure>
      </sect3>

      <sect3>
	<title xml:lang="en">Use Parameter Entities to Include Files</title>

	<note>
	  <para xml:lang="en">The previous steps must have completed before this
	    step.</para>
	</note>

	<procedure>
	  <step>
	    <para xml:lang="en">Edit <filename>example.xml</filename> so that it
	      looks like this:</para>

	    <programlisting xml:lang="en">&lt;!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN"
"http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd" [
&lt;!ENTITY % entities SYSTEM "entities.ent"&gt; %entities;
]&gt;

<tag class="starttag">html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"</tag>
  <tag class="starttag">head</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">title</tag>An Example XHTML File<tag class="endtag">title</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">head</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">body</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">p</tag>The current version of this document is: &amp;version;<tag class="endtag">p</tag>

    &amp;para1;
    &amp;para2;
    &amp;para3;
  <tag class="endtag">body</tag>
<tag class="endtag">html</tag></programlisting>
	  </step>

	  <step>
	    <para xml:lang="en">Create a new file called
	      <filename>entities.ent</filename> with this
	      content:</para>

	    <programlisting xml:lang="en">&lt;!ENTITY version "1.1"&gt;
&lt;!ENTITY para1 SYSTEM "para1.xml"&gt;
&lt;!ENTITY para2 SYSTEM "para2.xml"&gt;
&lt;!ENTITY para3 SYSTEM "para3.xml"&gt;</programlisting>
	  </step>

	  <step>
	    <para xml:lang="en">Produce <filename>example.html</filename> by
	      normalizing <filename>example.xml</filename>.</para>

	    <screen xml:lang="en"><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>xmllint --dropdtd --noent example.xml &gt; example.html</userinput></screen>
	  </step>

	  <step>
	    <para xml:lang="en">Load <filename>example.html</filename> into the web
	      browser and confirm that the
	      <filename>para<replaceable>n</replaceable>.xml</filename>
	      files have been included in
	      <filename>example.html</filename>.</para>
	  </step>
	</procedure>
      </sect3>
    </sect2>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="xml-primer-marked-sections">
    <title xml:lang="en">Marked Sections</title>

    <para xml:lang="en"><acronym>XML</acronym> provides a mechanism to indicate that
      particular pieces of the document should be processed in a
      special way.  These are called
      <quote>marked sections</quote>.</para>

    <example>
      <title xml:lang="en">Structure of a Marked Section</title>

      <programlisting xml:lang="en">&lt;![<replaceable>KEYWORD</replaceable>[
  Contents of marked section
]]&gt;</programlisting>
    </example>

    <para xml:lang="en">As expected of an <acronym>XML</acronym> construct, a marked
      section starts with <literal>&lt;!</literal>.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en">The first square bracket begins the marked section.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en"><replaceable>KEYWORD</replaceable> describes how this marked
      section is to be processed by the parser.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en">The second square bracket indicates the start of the
      marked section's content.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en">The marked section is finished by closing the two square
      brackets, and then returning to the document context from the
      <acronym>XML</acronym> context with
      <literal>&gt;</literal>.</para>

    <sect2 xml:id="xml-primer-marked-section-keywords">
      <title xml:lang="en">Marked Section Keywords</title>

      <sect3 xml:id="xml-primer-cdata">
	<title xml:lang="en"><literal>CDATA</literal></title>

	<para xml:lang="en">These keywords denote the marked sections
	  <emphasis>content model</emphasis>, and allow you to change
	  it from the default.</para>

	<para xml:lang="en">When an <acronym>XML</acronym> parser is processing a
	  document, it keeps track of the
	  <quote>content model</quote>.</para>

	<para xml:lang="en">The content model describes the
	  content the parser is expecting to see and what it will do
	  with that content.</para>

	<para xml:lang="en">The <literal>CDATA</literal> content model is one of the
	  most useful.</para>

	<para xml:lang="en"><literal>CDATA</literal> is for
	  <quote>Character Data</quote>.  When the parser is in this
	  content model, it expects to see only characters.  In this
	  model the <literal>&lt;</literal> and
	  <literal>&amp;</literal> symbols lose their special status,
	  and will be treated as ordinary characters.</para>

	<note>
	  <para xml:lang="en">When using <literal>CDATA</literal> in examples of
	    text marked up in <acronym>XML</acronym>, remember that
	    the content of <literal>CDATA</literal> is not validated.
	    The included text must be check with other means.  For
	    example, the content could be written in another document,
	    validated, and then pasted into the
	    <literal>CDATA</literal> section.</para>
	</note>

	<example>
	  <title xml:lang="en">Using a <literal>CDATA</literal> Marked
	    Section</title>

	  <programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">para</tag>Here is an example of how to include some text that contains
  many <tag class="starttag">literal</tag>&amp;lt;<tag class="endtag">literal</tag> and <tag class="starttag">literal</tag>&amp;amp;<tag class="endtag">literal</tag>
  symbols.  The sample text is a fragment of
  <tag class="starttag">acronym</tag>XHTML<tag class="endtag">acronym</tag>.  The surrounding text (<tag class="starttag">para</tag> and
  <tag class="starttag">programlisting</tag>) are from DocBook.<tag class="endtag">para</tag>

<tag class="starttag">programlisting</tag>&lt;![CDATA[<tag class="starttag">p</tag>This is a sample that shows some of the
  elements within <tag class="starttag">acronym</tag>XHTML<tag class="endtag">acronym</tag>.  Since the angle
  brackets are used so many times, it is simpler to say the whole
  example is a CDATA marked section than to use the entity names for
  the left and right angle brackets throughout.<tag class="endtag">p</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">ul</tag>
      <tag class="starttag">li</tag>This is a listitem<tag class="endtag">li</tag>
      <tag class="starttag">li</tag>This is a second listitem<tag class="endtag">li</tag>
      <tag class="starttag">li</tag>This is a third listitem<tag class="endtag">li</tag>
    <tag class="endtag">ul</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">p</tag>This is the end of the example.<tag class="endtag">p</tag>]]&gt;<tag class="endtag">programlisting</tag></programlisting>
	</example>
      </sect3>

      <sect3 xml:id="xml-primer-include-ignore">
	<title xml:lang="en"><literal>INCLUDE</literal> and
	  <literal>IGNORE</literal></title>

	<para xml:lang="en">When the keyword is <literal>INCLUDE</literal>, then the
	  contents of the marked section will be processed.  When the
	  keyword is <literal>IGNORE</literal>, the marked section
	  is ignored and will not be processed.  It will not appear in
	  the output.</para>

	<example>
	  <title xml:lang="en">Using <literal>INCLUDE</literal> and
	    <literal>IGNORE</literal> in Marked Sections</title>

	  <programlisting xml:lang="en">&lt;![INCLUDE[
  This text will be processed and included.
]]&gt;

&lt;![IGNORE[
  This text will not be processed or included.
]]&gt;</programlisting>
	</example>

	<para xml:lang="en">By itself, this is not too useful.  Text to be
	  removed from the document could be cut out, or wrapped
	  in comments.</para>

	<para xml:lang="en">It becomes more useful when controlled by
	  <link linkend="xml-primer-parameter-entities">parameter
	    entities</link>, yet this usage is limited
	  to entity files.</para>

	<para xml:lang="en">For example, suppose that documentation was produced in
	  a hard-copy version and an electronic version.  Some extra
	  text is desired in the electronic version content that was
	  not to appear in the hard-copy.</para>

	<para xml:lang="en">Create an entity file that defines general entities to
	  include each chapter and guard these definitions with a
	  parameter entity that can be set to either
	  <literal>INCLUDE</literal> or <literal>IGNORE</literal> to
	  control whether the entity is defined.  After these
	  conditional general entity definitions, place one more
	  definition for each general entity to set them to an empty
	  value.  This technique makes use of the fact that entity
	  definitions cannot be overridden but the first definition
	  always takes effect.  So the inclusion of the chapter is
	  controlled with the corresponding parameter entity.  Set to
	  <literal>INCLUDE</literal>, the first general entity
	  definition will be read and the second one will be ignored.
	  Set to <literal>IGNORE</literal>, the first definition will
	  be ignored and the second one will take effect.</para>

	<example>
	  <title xml:lang="en">Using a Parameter Entity to Control a Marked
	    Section</title>

	  <programlisting xml:lang="en">&lt;!ENTITY % electronic.copy "INCLUDE"&gt;

&lt;![%electronic.copy;[
&lt;!ENTITY chap.preface	SYSTEM "preface.xml"&gt;
]]&gt;

&lt;!ENTITY chap.preface ""&gt;</programlisting>

	  <para xml:lang="en">When producing the hard-copy version, change the
	    parameter entity's definition to:</para>

	  <programlisting xml:lang="en">&lt;!ENTITY % electronic.copy "IGNORE"&gt;</programlisting>
	</example>
      </sect3>
    </sect2>

    <sect2>
      <title xml:lang="en">To Do…</title>

      <procedure>
	<step>
	  <para xml:lang="en">Modify <filename>entities.ent</filename> to
	    contain the following:</para>

	  <programlisting xml:lang="en">&lt;!ENTITY version "1.1"&gt;
&lt;!ENTITY % conditional.text "IGNORE"&gt;

&lt;![%conditional.text;[
&lt;!ENTITY para1 SYSTEM "para1.xml"&gt;
]]&gt;

&lt;!ENTITY para1 ""&gt;

&lt;!ENTITY para2 SYSTEM "para2.xml"&gt;
&lt;!ENTITY para3 SYSTEM "para3.xml"&gt;</programlisting>
	</step>

	<step>
	  <para xml:lang="en">Normalize <filename>example.xml</filename>
	    and notice that the conditional text is not present in the
	    output document.  Set the parameter entity
	    guard to <literal>INCLUDE</literal> and regenerate the
	    normalized document and the text will appear again.
	    This method makes sense if there are more
	    conditional chunks depending on the same condition.  For
	    example, to control generating printed or online
	    text.</para>
	</step>
      </procedure>
    </sect2>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="xml-primer-conclusion">
    <title xml:lang="en">Conclusion</title>

    <para xml:lang="en">That is the conclusion of this <acronym>XML</acronym>
      primer.  For reasons of space and complexity, several things
      have not been covered in depth (or at all).  However, the
      previous sections cover enough <acronym>XML</acronym> to
      introduce the organization of the <acronym>FDP</acronym>
      documentation.</para>
  </sect1>
</chapter>

  
<!-- Copyright (c) 1998, 1999 Nik Clayton, All rights reserved.

     Redistribution and use in source (SGML DocBook) and 'compiled' forms
     (SGML HTML, PDF, PostScript, RTF and so forth) with or without
     modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
     are met:

      1. Redistributions of source code (SGML DocBook) must retain the above
         copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
         disclaimer as the first lines of this file unmodified.

      2. Redistributions in compiled form (transformed to other DTDs,
         converted to PDF, PostScript, RTF and other formats) must reproduce
         the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
         following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
         provided with the distribution.

     THIS DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED BY NIK CLAYTON "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR
     IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
     OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
     DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL NIK CLAYTON BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
     INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
     (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
     SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
     HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
     STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
     ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
     POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

     $FreeBSD$
-->
<chapter version="5.0" xml:id="xhtml-markup">
  <title xml:lang="en"><acronym>XHTML</acronym> Markup</title>

  <sect1 xml:id="xhtml-markup-introduction">
    <title xml:lang="en">Introduction</title>

    <para xml:lang="en">This chapter describes usage of the <acronym>XHTML</acronym>
      markup language used for the FreeBSD web site.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en"><acronym>XHTML</acronym> is the <acronym>XML</acronym>
      version of the HyperText Markup Language, the markup language of
      choice on the World Wide Web.  More information can be found at
      <uri xlink:href="http://www.w3.org/">http://www.w3.org/</uri>.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en"><acronym>XHTML</acronym> is used to mark up pages on the
      FreeBSD web site.  It is usually not used to mark up other
      documentation, since DocBook offers a far richer set of elements
      from which to choose.  Consequently, <acronym>XHTML</acronym>
      pages will normally only be encountered when writing for the web
      site.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en"><acronym>HTML</acronym> has gone through a number of
      versions.  The <acronym>XML</acronym>-compliant version
      described here is called <acronym>XHTML</acronym>.  The latest
      widespread version is <acronym>XHTML</acronym> 1.0, available in
      both <emphasis>strict</emphasis> and
      <emphasis>transitional</emphasis> variants.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en">The <acronym>XHTML</acronym> <acronym>DTDs</acronym> are
      available from the Ports Collection in
      <package>textproc/xhtml</package>.  They are
      automatically installed by the <package>textproc/docproj</package> port.</para>

    <note>
      <para xml:lang="en">This is <emphasis>not</emphasis> an exhaustive list of
	elements, since that would just repeat the documentation for
	<acronym>XHTML</acronym>.  The aim is to list those elements
	most commonly used.  Please post questions about elements or
	uses not covered here to the <link xlink:href="http://lists.FreeBSD.org/mailman/listinfo/freebsd-doc">FreeBSD documentation project mailing list</link>.</para>
    </note>

    <note>
      <title xml:lang="en">Inline Versus Block</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">In the remainder of this document, when describing
	elements, <emphasis>inline</emphasis> means that the element
	can occur within a block element, and does not cause a line
	break.  A <emphasis>block</emphasis> element, by comparison,
	will cause a line break (and other processing) when it is
	encountered.</para>
    </note>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="xhtml-markup-fpi">
    <title xml:lang="en">Formal Public Identifier (<acronym>FPI</acronym>)</title>

    <para xml:lang="en">There are a number of <acronym>XHTML</acronym>
      <acronym>FPI</acronym>s, depending upon the version, or
      <emphasis>level</emphasis> of <acronym>XHTML</acronym> to which
      a document conforms.  Most <acronym>XHTML</acronym> documents on
      the FreeBSD web site comply with the transitional version of
      <acronym>XHTML</acronym> 1.0.</para>

    <programlisting xml:lang="en">PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN"</programlisting>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="xhtml-markup-sectional-elements">
    <title xml:lang="en">Sectional Elements</title>

    <para xml:lang="en">An <acronym>XHTML</acronym> document is normally split into
      two sections.  The first section, called the
      <emphasis>head</emphasis>, contains meta-information about the
      document, such as its title, the name of the author, the parent
      document, and so on.  The second section, the
      <emphasis>body</emphasis>, contains content that will be
      displayed to the user.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en">These sections are indicated with <tag>head</tag>
      and <tag>body</tag> elements respectively.  These
      elements are contained within the top-level
      <tag>html</tag> element.</para>

    <example>
      <title xml:lang="en">Normal <acronym>XHTML</acronym> Document
	Structure</title>

      <programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"</tag>
  <tag class="starttag">head</tag>
	  <tag class="starttag">title</tag><replaceable>The Document's Title</replaceable><tag class="endtag">title</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">head</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">body</tag>

    …

  <tag class="endtag">body</tag>
<tag class="endtag">html</tag></programlisting>
    </example>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="xhtml-markup-block-elements">
    <title xml:lang="en">Block Elements</title>

    <sect2 xml:id="xhtml-markup-block-elements-headings">
      <title xml:lang="en">Headings</title>

      <para xml:lang="en"><acronym>XHTML</acronym> has tags to denote headings in
	the document at up to six different levels.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">The largest and most prominent heading is
	<tag>h1</tag>, then <tag>h2</tag>,
	continuing down to <tag>h6</tag>.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">The element's content is the text of the heading.</para>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en"><tag>h1</tag>, <tag>h2</tag>,
	  and Other Header Tags</title>

	<para xml:lang="en">Usage:</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">h1</tag>First section<tag class="endtag">h1</tag>

&lt;!-- Document introduction goes here --&gt;

<tag class="starttag">h2</tag>This is the heading for the first section<tag class="endtag">h2</tag>

&lt;!-- Content for the first section goes here --&gt;

<tag class="starttag">h3</tag>This is the heading for the first sub-section<tag class="endtag">h3</tag>

&lt;!-- Content for the first sub-section goes here --&gt;

<tag class="starttag">h2</tag>This is the heading for the second section<tag class="endtag">h2</tag>

&lt;!-- Content for the second section goes here --&gt;</programlisting>
      </example>

      <para xml:lang="en">Generally, an <acronym>XHTML</acronym> page should have
	one first level heading (<tag>h1</tag>).  This can
	contain many second level headings (<tag>h2</tag>),
	which can in turn contain many third level headings.  Do not
	leave gaps in the numbering.</para>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="xhtml-markup-block-elements-paragraphs">
      <title xml:lang="en">Paragraphs</title>

      <para xml:lang="en"><acronym>XHTML</acronym> supports a single paragraph
	element, <tag>p</tag>.</para>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en"><tag>p</tag> Example</title>

	<para xml:lang="en">Usage:</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">p</tag>This is a paragraph.  It can contain just about any
  other element.<tag class="endtag">p</tag></programlisting>
      </example>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="xhtml-markup-block-elements-block-quotations">
      <title xml:lang="en">Block Quotations</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">A block quotation is an extended quotation from another
	document that will appear in a separate paragraph.</para>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en"><tag>blockquote</tag> Example</title>

	<para xml:lang="en">Usage:</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">p</tag>A small excerpt from the US Constitution:<tag class="endtag">p</tag>

<tag class="starttag">blockquote</tag>We the People of the United States, in Order to form
  a more perfect Union, establish Justice, insure domestic
  Tranquility, provide for the common defence, promote the general
  Welfare, and secure the Blessings of Liberty to ourselves and our
  Posterity, do ordain and establish this Constitution for the
  United States of America.<tag class="endtag">blockquote</tag></programlisting>
      </example>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="xhtml-markup-block-elements-lists">
      <title xml:lang="en">Lists</title>

      <para xml:lang="en"><acronym>XHTML</acronym> can present the user with three
	types of lists: ordered, unordered, and definition.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">Entries in an ordered list will be numbered, while entries
	in an unordered list will be preceded by bullet points.
	Definition lists have two sections for each entry.  The first
	section is the term being defined, and the second section is
	the definition.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">Ordered lists are indicated by the <tag>ol</tag>
	element, unordered lists by the <tag>ul</tag>
	element, and definition lists by the <tag>dl</tag>
	element.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">Ordered and unordered lists contain listitems, indicated
	by the <tag>li</tag> element.  A listitem can
	contain textual content, or it may be further wrapped in one
	or more <tag>p</tag> elements.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">Definition lists contain definition terms
	(<tag>dt</tag>) and definition descriptions
	(<tag>dd</tag>).  A definition term can only contain
	inline elements.  A definition description can contain other
	block elements.</para>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en"><tag>ul</tag> and
	  <tag>ol</tag> Example</title>

	<para xml:lang="en">Usage:</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">p</tag>An unordered list.  Listitems will probably be
  preceded by bullets.<tag class="endtag">p</tag>

<tag class="starttag">ul</tag>
  <tag class="starttag">li</tag>First item<tag class="endtag">li</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">li</tag>Second item<tag class="endtag">li</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">li</tag>Third item<tag class="endtag">li</tag>
<tag class="endtag">ul</tag>

<tag class="starttag">p</tag>An ordered list, with list items consisting of multiple
  paragraphs.  Each item (note: not each paragraph) will be
  numbered.<tag class="endtag">p</tag>

<tag class="starttag">ol</tag>
  <tag class="starttag">li</tag><tag class="starttag">p</tag>This is the first item.  It only has one paragraph.<tag class="endtag">p</tag><tag class="endtag">li</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">li</tag><tag class="starttag">p</tag>This is the first paragraph of the second item.<tag class="endtag">p</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">p</tag>This is the second paragraph of the second item.<tag class="endtag">p</tag><tag class="endtag">li</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">li</tag><tag class="starttag">p</tag>This is the first and only paragraph of the third
    item.<tag class="endtag">p</tag><tag class="endtag">li</tag>
<tag class="endtag">ol</tag></programlisting>
      </example>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en">Definition Lists with <tag>dl</tag></title>

	<para xml:lang="en">Usage:</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">dl</tag>
  <tag class="starttag">dt</tag>Term 1<tag class="endtag">dt</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">dd</tag><tag class="starttag">p</tag>Paragraph 1 of definition 1.<tag class="endtag">p</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">p</tag>Paragraph 2 of definition 1.<tag class="endtag">p</tag><tag class="endtag">dd</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">dt</tag>Term 2<tag class="endtag">dt</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">dd</tag><tag class="starttag">p</tag>Paragraph 1 of definition 2.<tag class="endtag">p</tag><tag class="endtag">dd</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">dt</tag>Term 3<tag class="endtag">dt</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">dd</tag><tag class="starttag">p</tag>Paragraph 1 of definition 3.<tag class="endtag">p</tag><tag class="endtag">dd</tag>
<tag class="endtag">dl</tag></programlisting>
      </example>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="xhtml-markup-block-elements-preformatted-text">
      <title xml:lang="en">Pre-formatted Text</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">Pre-formatted text is shown to the user exactly as it is
	in the file.  Text is shown in a fixed font.  Multiple spaces
	and line breaks are shown exactly as they are in the
	file.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">Wrap pre-formatted text in the <tag>pre</tag>
	element.</para>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en"><tag>pre</tag> Example</title>

	<para xml:lang="en">For example, the <tag>pre</tag> tags could be
	  used to mark up an email message:</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">pre</tag>  From: nik@FreeBSD.org
  To: freebsd-doc@FreeBSD.org
  Subject: New documentation available

  There is a new copy of my primer for contributors to the FreeBSD
  Documentation Project available at

    &amp;lt;URL:http://people.FreeBSD.org/~nik/primer/index.html&amp;gt;

  Comments appreciated.

  N<tag class="endtag">pre</tag></programlisting>

	<para xml:lang="en">Keep in mind that <literal>&lt;</literal> and
	  <literal>&amp;</literal> still are recognized as special
	  characters in pre-formatted text.  This is why the example
	  shown had to use <literal>&amp;lt;</literal> instead of
	  <literal>&lt;</literal>.  For consistency,
	  <literal>&amp;gt;</literal> was used in place of
	  <literal>&gt;</literal>, too.  Watch out for the special
	  characters that may appear in text copied from a plain-text
	  source, like an email message or program code.</para>
      </example>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="xhtml-markup-block-elements-tables">
      <title xml:lang="en">Tables</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">Mark up tabular information using the
	<tag>table</tag> element.  A table consists of one or
	more table rows (<tag>tr</tag>), each containing one
	or more cells of table data (<tag>td</tag>).  Each
	cell can contain other block elements, such as paragraphs or
	lists.  It can also contain another table (this nesting can
	repeat indefinitely).  If the cell only contains one paragraph
	then the <tag>p</tag>element is not needed.</para>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en">Simple Use of <tag>table</tag></title>

	<para xml:lang="en">Usage:</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">p</tag>This is a simple 2x2 table.<tag class="endtag">p</tag>

<tag class="starttag">table</tag>
  <tag class="starttag">tr</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">td</tag>Top left cell<tag class="endtag">td</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">td</tag>Top right cell<tag class="endtag">td</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">tr</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">tr</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">td</tag>Bottom left cell<tag class="endtag">td</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">td</tag>Bottom right cell<tag class="endtag">td</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">tr</tag>
<tag class="endtag">table</tag></programlisting>
      </example>

      <para xml:lang="en">A cell can span multiple rows and columns by adding the
	<tag class="attribute">rowspan</tag> or
	<tag class="attribute">colspan</tag> attributes with
	values for the number of rows or columns to be spanned.</para>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en">Using
	  <tag class="attribute">rowspan</tag></title>

	<para xml:lang="en">Usage:</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">p</tag>One tall thin cell on the left, two short cells next to
  it on the right.<tag class="endtag">p</tag>

<tag class="starttag">table</tag>
  <tag class="starttag">tr</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">td rowspan="2"</tag>Long and thin<tag class="endtag">td</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">tr</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">tr</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">td</tag>Top cell<tag class="endtag">td</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">td</tag>Bottom cell<tag class="endtag">td</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">tr</tag>
<tag class="endtag">table</tag></programlisting>
      </example>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en">Using
	  <tag class="attribute">colspan</tag></title>

	<para xml:lang="en">Usage:</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">p</tag>One long cell on top, two short cells below it.<tag class="endtag">p</tag>

<tag class="starttag">table</tag>
  <tag class="starttag">tr</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">td colspan="2"</tag>Top cell<tag class="endtag">td</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">tr</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">tr</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">td</tag>Bottom left cell<tag class="endtag">td</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">td</tag>Bottom right cell<tag class="endtag">td</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">tr</tag>
<tag class="endtag">table</tag></programlisting>
      </example>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en">Using <tag class="attribute">rowspan</tag> and
	  <tag class="attribute">colspan</tag>
	  Together</title>

	<para xml:lang="en">Usage:</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">p</tag>On a 3x3 grid, the top left block is a 2x2 set of
  cells merged into one.  The other cells are normal.<tag class="endtag">p</tag>

<tag class="starttag">table</tag>
  <tag class="starttag">tr</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">td colspan="2" rowspan="2"</tag>Top left large cell<tag class="endtag">td</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">td</tag>Top right cell<tag class="endtag">td</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">tr</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">tr</tag>
    &lt;!-- Because the large cell on the left merges into
         this row, the first &lt;td&gt; will occur on its
         right --&gt;

    <tag class="starttag">td</tag>Middle right cell<tag class="endtag">td</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">tr</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">tr</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">td</tag>Bottom left cell<tag class="endtag">td</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">td</tag>Bottom middle cell<tag class="endtag">td</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">td</tag>Bottom right cell<tag class="endtag">td</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">tr</tag>
<tag class="endtag">table</tag></programlisting>
      </example>
    </sect2>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="xhtml-markup-inline-elements">
    <title xml:lang="en">In-line Elements</title>

    <sect2 xml:id="xhtml-markup-inline-elements-emphasizing-information">
      <title xml:lang="en">Emphasizing Information</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">Two levels of emphasis are available in
	<acronym>XHTML</acronym>, <tag>em</tag> and
	<tag>strong</tag>.  <tag>em</tag> is for a
	normal level of emphasis and <tag>strong</tag>
	indicates stronger emphasis.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en"><tag>em</tag> is typically rendered in italic
	and <tag>strong</tag> is rendered in bold.  This is
	not always the case, and should not be relied upon.  According
	to best practices, web pages only hold structural and
	semantical information, and stylesheets are later applied to
	them.  Think of semantics, not formatting, when using these
	tags.</para>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en"><tag>em</tag> and
	  <tag>strong</tag> Example</title>

	<para xml:lang="en">Usage:</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">p</tag><tag class="starttag">em</tag>This<tag class="endtag">em</tag> has been emphasized, while
  <tag class="starttag">strong</tag>this<tag class="endtag">strong</tag> has been strongly emphasized.<tag class="endtag">p</tag></programlisting>
      </example>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="xhtml-markup-inline-elements-fixed-pitch-text">
      <title xml:lang="en">Indicating Fixed-Pitch Text</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">Content that should be rendered in a fixed pitch
	(typewriter) typeface is tagged with <tag>tt</tag>
	(for <quote>teletype</quote>).</para>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en"><tag>tt</tag> Example</title>

	<para xml:lang="en">Usage:</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">p</tag>Many system settings are stored in
  <tag class="starttag">tt</tag>/etc<tag class="endtag">tt</tag>.<tag class="endtag">p</tag></programlisting>
      </example>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="xhtml-markup-inline-elements-links">
      <title xml:lang="en">Links</title>

      <note>
	<para xml:lang="en">Links are also inline elements.</para>
      </note>

      <sect3 xml:id="xhtml-markup-inline-elements-linking">
	<title xml:lang="en">Linking to Other Documents on the Web</title>

	<para xml:lang="en">A link points to the <acronym>URL</acronym> of a
	  document on the web.  The link is indicated with
	  <tag>a</tag>, and the
	  <tag class="attribute">href</tag> attribute contains
	  the <acronym>URL</acronym> of the target document.  The
	  content of the element becomes the link, indicated to the
	  user by showing it in a different color or with an
	  underline.</para>

	<example>
	  <title xml:lang="en">Using
	    <tag class="starttag">a href="..."</tag></title>

	  <para xml:lang="en">Usage:</para>

	  <programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">p</tag>More information is available at the
  <tag class="starttag">a href="http://www.&amp;os;.org/"</tag>&amp;os; web site<tag class="endtag">a</tag>.<tag class="endtag">p</tag></programlisting>
	</example>

	<para xml:lang="en">This link always takes the user to the top of the linked
	  document.</para>
      </sect3>

      <sect3 xml:id="xhtml-markup-inline-elements-specific-parts">
	<title xml:lang="en">Linking to Specific Parts of Documents</title>

	<para xml:lang="en">To link to a specific point within a document, that
	  document must include an <emphasis>anchor</emphasis> at the
	  desired point.  Anchors are included by setting the
	  <tag class="attribute">id</tag> attribute of an
	  element to a name.  This example creates an anchor by
	  setting the <tag class="attribute">id</tag>
	  attribute of a <tag class="element">p</tag>
	  element.</para>

	<example>
	  <title xml:lang="en">Creating an Anchor</title>

	  <para xml:lang="en">Usage:</para>

	  <programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">p id="samplepara"</tag>This paragraph can be referenced
  in other links with the name <tag class="starttag">tt</tag>samplepara<tag class="endtag">tt</tag>.<tag class="endtag">p</tag></programlisting>
	</example>

	<para xml:lang="en">Links to anchors are similar to plain links, but include
	  a <literal>#</literal> symbol and the anchor's
	  <acronym>ID</acronym> at the end of the
	  <acronym>URL</acronym>.</para>

	<example>
	  <title xml:lang="en">Linking to a Named Part of a Different
	    Document</title>

	  <para xml:lang="en">The <literal>samplepara</literal> example is part of a
	    document called <filename>foo.html</filename>.  A link to
	    that specific paragraph in the document is constructed in
	    this example.</para>

	  <programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">p</tag>More information can be found in the
  <tag class="starttag">a href="foo.html#samplepara"</tag>sample paragraph<tag class="endtag">a</tag> of
  <tag class="starttag">tt</tag>foo.html<tag class="endtag">tt</tag>.<tag class="endtag">p</tag></programlisting>
	</example>

	<para xml:lang="en">To link to a named anchor within the same document, omit
	  the document's <acronym>URL</acronym>, and just use the
	  <literal>#</literal> symbol followed by the name of the
	  anchor.</para>

	<example>
	  <title xml:lang="en">Linking to a Named Part of the Same Document</title>

	  <para xml:lang="en">The <literal>samplepara</literal> example
	    resides in this document.  To link to it:</para>

	  <programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">p</tag>More information can be found in the
  <tag class="starttag">a href="#samplepara"</tag>sample paragraph<tag class="endtag">a</tag> of this
  document.<tag class="endtag">p</tag></programlisting>
	</example>
      </sect3>
    </sect2>
  </sect1>
</chapter>

  
<!-- Copyright (c) 1998, 1999 Nik Clayton, All rights reserved.

     Redistribution and use in source (SGML DocBook) and 'compiled' forms
     (SGML HTML, PDF, PostScript, RTF and so forth) with or without
     modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
     are met:

      1. Redistributions of source code (SGML DocBook) must retain the above
         copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
         disclaimer as the first lines of this file unmodified.

      2. Redistributions in compiled form (transformed to other DTDs,
         converted to PDF, PostScript, RTF and other formats) must reproduce
         the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
         following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
         provided with the distribution.

     THIS DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED BY NIK CLAYTON "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR
     IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
     OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
     DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL NIK CLAYTON BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
     INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
     (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
     SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
     HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
     STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
     ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
     POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

     $FreeBSD$
-->

<chapter version="5.0" xml:id="docbook-markup">

  <title xml:lang="en">DocBook Markup</title>

  <sect1 xml:id="docbook-markup-introduction">
    <title xml:lang="en">Introduction</title>

    <para xml:lang="en">This chapter is an introduction to DocBook as it is used for
      FreeBSD documentation.  DocBook is a large and complex markup
      system, but the subset described here covers the parts that are
      most widely used for FreeBSD documentation.  While a moderate
      subset is covered, it is impossible to anticipate every
      situation.  Please post questions that this document does
      not answer to the <link xlink:href="http://lists.FreeBSD.org/mailman/listinfo/freebsd-doc">FreeBSD documentation project mailing list</link>.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en">DocBook was originally developed by HaL Computer Systems and
      O'Reilly &amp; Associates to be a Document Type Definition
      (<acronym>DTD</acronym>) for writing technical documentation
      <footnote><para xml:lang="en">A short history can be found under <link xlink:href="http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/intro.shtml#d0e41">http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/intro.shtml#d0e41</link>.</para></footnote>.
      Since 1998 it is maintained by the <link xlink:href="http://www.oasis-open.org/committees/tc_home.php?wg_abbrev=docbook">
	DocBook Technical Committee</link>.  As such, and unlike
      LinuxDoc and <acronym>XHTML</acronym>, DocBook is very heavily
      oriented towards markup that describes <emphasis>what</emphasis>
      something is, rather than describing <emphasis>how</emphasis> it
      should be presented.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en">The DocBook <acronym>DTD</acronym> is available from the
      Ports Collection in the
      <package>textproc/docbook-xml</package>
      port.  It is automatically installed as part of the
      <package>textproc/docproj</package>
      port.</para>

    <note>
      <title xml:lang="en">Formal Versus Informal</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">Some elements may exist in two forms,
	<emphasis>formal</emphasis> and <emphasis>informal</emphasis>.
	Typically, the formal version of the element will consist of a
	title followed by the informal version of the element.  The
	informal version will not have a title.</para>
    </note>

    <note>
      <title xml:lang="en">Inline Versus Block</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">In the remainder of this document, when describing
	elements, <emphasis>inline</emphasis> means that the element
	can occur within a block element, and does not cause a line
	break.  A <emphasis>block</emphasis> element, by comparison,
	will cause a line break (and other processing) when it is
	encountered.</para>
    </note>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="docbook-markup-freebsd-extensions">
    <title xml:lang="en">FreeBSD Extensions</title>

    <para xml:lang="en">The FreeBSD Documentation Project has extended the DocBook
      <acronym>DTD</acronym> with additional elements and entities.
      These additions serve to make some of the markup easier or more
      precise.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en">Throughout the rest of this document, the term
      <quote>DocBook</quote> is used to mean the FreeBSD-extended
      DocBook <acronym>DTD</acronym>.</para>

    <note>
      <para xml:lang="en">Most of these extensions are not unique to FreeBSD, it was
	just felt that they were useful enhancements for this
	particular project.  Should anyone from any of the other *nix
	camps (NetBSD, OpenBSD, Linux, …) be interested in
	collaborating on a standard DocBook extension set, please
	contact Documentation Engineering Team <email>doceng@FreeBSD.org</email>.</para>
    </note>

    <sect2 xml:id="docbook-markup-freebsd-extensions-elements">
      <title xml:lang="en">FreeBSD Elements</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">The additional FreeBSD elements are not (currently) in the
	Ports Collection.  They are stored in the FreeBSD Subversion
	tree, as <link xlink:href="http://svnweb.FreeBSD.org/doc/head/share/xml/freebsd.dtd">head/share/xml/freebsd.dtd</link>.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">FreeBSD-specific elements used in the examples below are
	clearly marked.</para>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="docbook-markup-freebsd-extensions-entities">
      <title xml:lang="en">FreeBSD Entities</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">This table shows some of the most useful entities
	available in the <acronym>FDP</acronym>.  For a complete list,
	see the <filename>*.ent</filename> files in
	<filename>doc/share/xml</filename>.</para>

      <informaltable frame="none" pgwide="1">
	<tgroup cols="3">
	  <colspec colname="entity"/>
	  <colspec colname="expandsto"/>
	  <colspec colname="notes"/>
	  <thead>
	    <row>
	      <entry/>
	      <entry/>
	      <entry/>
	    </row>
	  </thead>

	  <tbody valign="top">
	    <row>
	      <entry namest="entity" nameend="notes" xml:lang="en"><emphasis>FreeBSD
		  Name Entities</emphasis></entry>
	    </row>

	    <row>
	      <entry xml:lang="en"><literal>&amp;os;</literal></entry>
	      <entry xml:lang="en"><literal>FreeBSD</literal></entry>
	      <entry/>
	    </row>

	    <row>
	      <entry xml:lang="en"><literal>&amp;os.stable;</literal></entry>
	      <entry xml:lang="en"><literal>FreeBSD-STABLE</literal></entry>
	      <entry/>
	    </row>

	    <row>
	      <entry xml:lang="en"><literal>&amp;os.current;</literal></entry>
	      <entry xml:lang="en"><literal>FreeBSD-CURRENT</literal></entry>
	      <entry/>
	    </row>

	    <row>
	      <entry/>
	      <entry/>
	      <entry/>
	    </row>

	    <row>
	      <entry namest="entity" nameend="notes" xml:lang="en">Manual Page
		Entities</entry>
	    </row>

	    <row>
	      <entry xml:lang="en"><literal>&amp;man.ls.1;</literal></entry>
	      <entry xml:lang="en"><citerefentry><refentrytitle>ls</refentrytitle><manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry></entry>
	      <entry xml:lang="en">Usage: <literal>&amp;man.ls.1; is the manual page
		  for
		  &lt;command&gt;ls&lt;/command&gt;.</literal></entry>
	    </row>

	    <row>
	      <entry xml:lang="en"><literal>&amp;man.cp.1;</literal></entry>
	      <entry xml:lang="en"><citerefentry><refentrytitle>cp</refentrytitle><manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry></entry>
	      <entry xml:lang="en">Usage: <literal>The manual page for
		  &lt;command&gt;cp&lt;/command&gt; is
		  &amp;man.cp.1;.</literal></entry>
	    </row>

	    <row>
	      <entry xml:lang="en"><literal>&amp;man.<replaceable>command</replaceable>.<replaceable>sectionnumber</replaceable>;</literal></entry>
	      <entry xml:lang="en"><emphasis>link to
		  <replaceable>command</replaceable> manual page in
		  section
		  <replaceable>sectionnumber</replaceable></emphasis></entry>
	      <entry xml:lang="en">Entities are defined for all the
		<link xlink:href="@@URL_RELPREFIX@@/cgi/man.cgi">FreeBSD manual
		  pages</link>.</entry>
	    </row>

	    <row>
	      <entry/>
	      <entry/>
	      <entry/>
	    </row>

	    <row>
	      <entry namest="entity" nameend="notes" xml:lang="en">FreeBSD Mailing List
		Entities</entry>
	    </row>

	    <row>
	      <entry xml:lang="en"><literal>&amp;a.doc;</literal></entry>
	      <entry xml:lang="en"><literal><link xlink:href="http://lists.FreeBSD.org/mailman/listinfo/freebsd-doc">FreeBSD documentation project mailing list</link></literal></entry>
	      <entry xml:lang="en">Usage: <literal>A link to the
		  &amp;a.doc;.</literal></entry>
	    </row>

	    <row>
	      <entry xml:lang="en"><literal>&amp;a.questions;</literal></entry>
	      <entry xml:lang="en"><literal><link xlink:href="http://lists.FreeBSD.org/mailman/listinfo/freebsd-questions">FreeBSD general questions mailing list</link></literal></entry>
	      <entry xml:lang="en">Usage: <literal>A link to the
		  &amp;a.questions;.</literal></entry>
	    </row>

	    <row>
	      <entry xml:lang="en"><literal>&amp;a.<replaceable>listname</replaceable>;</literal></entry>
	      <entry xml:lang="en"><emphasis>link to
		  <replaceable>listname</replaceable></emphasis></entry>
	      <entry xml:lang="en">Entities are defined for all the <link xlink:href="@@URL_RELPREFIX@@/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/eresources.html#eresources-mail">FreeBSD
		  mailing lists</link>.</entry>
	    </row>

	    <row>
	      <entry/>
	      <entry/>
	      <entry/>
	    </row>

	    <row>
	      <entry namest="entity" nameend="notes" xml:lang="en">FreeBSD Document
		Link Entities</entry>
	    </row>

	    <row>
	      <entry xml:lang="en"><literal>&amp;url.books.handbook;</literal></entry>
	      <entry xml:lang="en"><literal>@@URL_RELPREFIX@@/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook</literal></entry>
	      <entry xml:lang="en">Usage: <literal>A link to the &lt;link
		  xlink:href="&amp;url.books.handbook;/advanced-networking.html"&gt;Advanced
		  Networking&lt;/link&gt; chapter of the
		  Handbook.</literal></entry>
	    </row>

	    <row>
	      <entry xml:lang="en"><literal>&amp;url.books.<replaceable>bookname</replaceable>;</literal></entry>
	      <entry xml:lang="en"><emphasis>relative path to
		  <replaceable>bookname</replaceable></emphasis></entry>
	      <entry xml:lang="en">Entities are defined for all the <link xlink:href="@@URL_RELPREFIX@@/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/">FreeBSD
		  books</link>.</entry>
	    </row>

	    <row>
	      <entry xml:lang="en"><literal>&amp;url.articles.committers-guide;</literal></entry>
	      <entry xml:lang="en"><literal>@@URL_RELPREFIX@@/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/articles/committers-guide</literal></entry>
	      <entry xml:lang="en">Usage: <literal>A link to the &lt;link
		  xlink:href="&amp;url.articles.committers-guide;"&gt;Committer's
		  Guide&lt;/link&gt;
		  article.</literal></entry>
	    </row>

	    <row>
	      <entry xml:lang="en"><literal>&amp;url.articles.<replaceable>articlename</replaceable>;</literal></entry>
	      <entry xml:lang="en"><emphasis>relative path to
		  <replaceable>articlename</replaceable></emphasis></entry>
	      <entry xml:lang="en">Entities are defined for all the <link xlink:href="@@URL_RELPREFIX@@/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/articles/">FreeBSD
		  articles</link>.</entry>
	    </row>

	    <row>
	      <entry/>
	      <entry/>
	      <entry/>
	    </row>

	    <row>
	      <entry namest="entity" nameend="notes" xml:lang="en">Other Operating
		System Name Entities</entry>
	    </row>

	    <row>
	      <entry xml:lang="en"><literal>&amp;linux;</literal></entry>
	      <entry xml:lang="en"><trademark class="registered">Linux</trademark></entry>
	      <entry xml:lang="en">The <trademark class="registered">Linux</trademark> operating system.</entry>
	    </row>

	    <row>
	      <entry xml:lang="en"><literal>&amp;unix;</literal></entry>
	      <entry xml:lang="en"><trademark class="registered">UNIX</trademark></entry>
	      <entry xml:lang="en">The <trademark class="registered">UNIX</trademark> operating system.</entry>
	    </row>

	    <row>
	      <entry xml:lang="en"><literal>&amp;windows;</literal></entry>
	      <entry xml:lang="en"><trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark></entry>
	      <entry xml:lang="en">The <trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark> operating system.</entry>
	    </row>

	    <row>
	      <entry/>
	      <entry/>
	      <entry/>
	    </row>

	    <row>
	      <entry namest="entity" nameend="notes" xml:lang="en">Miscellaneous
		Entities</entry>
	    </row>

	    <row>
	      <entry xml:lang="en"><literal>&amp;prompt.root;</literal></entry>
	      <entry><prompt>#</prompt></entry>
	      <entry xml:lang="en">The <systemitem class="username">root</systemitem> user
		prompt.</entry>
	    </row>

	    <row>
	      <entry xml:lang="en"><literal>&amp;prompt.user;</literal></entry>
	      <entry><prompt>%</prompt></entry>
	      <entry xml:lang="en">A prompt for an unprivileged user.</entry>
	    </row>

	    <row>
	      <entry xml:lang="en"><literal>&amp;postscript;</literal></entry>
	      <entry xml:lang="en"><trademark class="registered">PostScript</trademark></entry>
	      <entry xml:lang="en">The
		<trademark class="registered">PostScript</trademark> programming language.</entry>
	    </row>

	    <row>
	      <entry xml:lang="en"><literal>&amp;tex;</literal></entry>
	      <entry xml:lang="en"><application>TeX</application></entry>
	      <entry xml:lang="en">The
		<application>TeX</application> typesetting language.</entry>
	    </row>

	    <row>
	      <entry xml:lang="en"><literal>&amp;xorg;</literal></entry>
	      <entry xml:lang="en">Xorg</entry>
	      <entry xml:lang="en">The Xorg open source X
		Window System.</entry>
	    </row>
	  </tbody>
	</tgroup>
      </informaltable>
    </sect2>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="docbook-markup-fpi">
    <title xml:lang="en">Formal Public Identifier (FPI)</title>

    <para xml:lang="en">In compliance with the DocBook guidelines for writing
      <acronym>FPI</acronym>s for DocBook customizations, the
      <acronym>FPI</acronym> for the FreeBSD extended DocBook
      <acronym>DTD</acronym> is:</para>

      <programlisting xml:lang="en">PUBLIC "-//FreeBSD//DTD DocBook V4.2-Based Extension//EN"</programlisting>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="docbook-markup-document-structure">
    <title xml:lang="en">Document Structure</title>

    <para xml:lang="en">DocBook allows structuring documentation in several ways.
      The FreeBSD Documentation Project uses two primary types of DocBook
      document: the book and the article.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en">Books are organized into <tag>chapter</tag>s.
      This is a mandatory requirement.  There may be
      <tag>part</tag>s between the book and the chapter to
      provide another layer of organization.  For example, the
      Handbook is arranged in this way.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en">A chapter may (or may not) contain one or more sections.
      These are indicated with the <tag>sect1</tag> element.
      If a section contains another section then use the
      <tag>sect2</tag> element, and so on, up to
      <tag>sect5</tag>.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en">Chapters and sections contain the remainder of the
      content.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en">An article is simpler than a book, and does not use
      chapters.  Instead, the content of an article is organized into
      one or more sections, using the same <tag>sect1</tag>
      (and <tag>sect2</tag> and so on) elements that are used
      in books.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en">The nature of the document being written should be used to
      determine whether it is best marked up as a book or an article.
      Articles are well suited to information that does not need to be
      broken down into several chapters, and that is, relatively
      speaking, quite short, at up to 20-25 pages of content.  Books
      are best suited to information that can be broken up into
      several chapters, possibly with appendices and similar content
      as well.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en">The <link xlink:href="@@URL_RELPREFIX@@/docs.html">FreeBSD
	tutorials</link> are all marked up as articles, while this
      document, the <link xlink:href="@@URL_RELPREFIX@@/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/faq/index.html">FAQ</link>,
      and the <link xlink:href="@@URL_RELPREFIX@@/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/index.html">Handbook</link> are all marked up as books, for
      example.</para>

    <sect2 xml:id="docbook-markup-starting-a-book">
      <title xml:lang="en">Starting a Book</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">The content of a book is contained within the
	<tag>book</tag> element.  As well as containing
	structural markup, this element can contain elements that
	include additional information about the book.  This is either
	meta-information, used for reference purposes, or additional
	content used to produce a title page.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">This additional information is contained within
	<tag>info</tag>.</para>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en">Boilerplate <tag>book</tag> with
	  <tag>info</tag></title>

	<!-- Cannot put this in a marked section because of the
	  replaceable elements -->

	<programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">book</tag>
  <tag class="starttag">info</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">title</tag><replaceable>Your Title Here</replaceable><tag class="endtag">title</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">author</tag>
      <tag class="starttag">personname</tag>
        <tag class="starttag">firstname</tag><replaceable>Your first name</replaceable><tag class="endtag">firstname</tag>
        <tag class="starttag">surname</tag><replaceable>Your surname</replaceable><tag class="endtag">surname</tag>
      <tag class="endtag">personname</tag>

      <tag class="starttag">affiliation</tag>
	<tag class="starttag">address</tag>
          <tag class="starttag">email</tag><replaceable>Your email address</replaceable><tag class="endtag">email</tag>
	<tag class="endtag">address</tag>
      <tag class="endtag">affiliation</tag>
    <tag class="endtag">author</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">copyright</tag>
      <tag class="starttag">year</tag><replaceable>1998</replaceable><tag class="endtag">year</tag>
      <tag class="starttag">holder role="mailto:<replaceable>your email address</replaceable>"</tag><replaceable>Your name</replaceable><tag class="endtag">holder</tag>
    <tag class="endtag">copyright</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">releaseinfo</tag>$FreeBSD$<tag class="endtag">releaseinfo</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">abstract</tag>
      <tag class="starttag">para</tag><replaceable>Include an abstract of the book's contents here.</replaceable><tag class="endtag">para</tag>
    <tag class="endtag">abstract</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">info</tag>

  …

<tag class="endtag">book</tag></programlisting>
      </example>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="docbook-markup-starting-an-article">
      <title xml:lang="en">Starting an Article</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">The content of the article is contained within the
	<tag>article</tag> element.  As well as containing
	structural markup, this element can contain elements that
	include additional information about the article.  This is
	either meta-information, used for reference purposes, or
	additional content used to produce a title page.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">This additional information is contained within
	<tag>info</tag>.</para>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en">Boilerplate <tag>article</tag> with
	  <tag>info</tag></title>

	<!-- Cannot put this in a marked section because of the
	  replaceable elements -->

	<programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">article</tag>
  <tag class="starttag">info</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">title</tag><replaceable>Your title here</replaceable><tag class="endtag">title</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">author</tag>
      <tag class="starttag">personname</tag>
	<tag class="starttag">firstname</tag><replaceable>Your first name</replaceable><tag class="endtag">firstname</tag>
	<tag class="starttag">surname</tag><replaceable>Your surname</replaceable><tag class="endtag">surname</tag>
      <tag class="endtag">personname</tag>

      <tag class="starttag">affiliation</tag>
	<tag class="starttag">address</tag>
	  <tag class="starttag">email</tag><replaceable>Your email address</replaceable><tag class="endtag">email</tag><tag class="endtag">address</tag>
	<tag class="endtag">address</tag>
      <tag class="endtag">affiliation</tag>
    <tag class="endtag">author</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">copyright</tag>
      <tag class="starttag">year</tag><replaceable>1998</replaceable><tag class="endtag">year</tag>
      <tag class="starttag">holder role="mailto:<replaceable>your email address</replaceable>"</tag><replaceable>Your name</replaceable><tag class="endtag">holder</tag>
    <tag class="endtag">copyright</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">releaseinfo</tag>$FreeBSD$<tag class="endtag">releaseinfo</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">abstract</tag>
      <tag class="starttag">para</tag><replaceable>Include an abstract of the article's contents here.</replaceable><tag class="endtag">para</tag>
    <tag class="endtag">abstract</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">info</tag>

  …

<tag class="endtag">article</tag></programlisting>
      </example>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="docbook-markup-indicating-chapters">
      <title xml:lang="en">Indicating Chapters</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">Use <tag>chapter</tag> to mark up your chapters.
	Each chapter has a mandatory <tag>title</tag>.
	Articles do not contain chapters, they are reserved for
	books.</para>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en">A Simple Chapter</title>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">chapter</tag>
  <tag class="starttag">title</tag>The Chapter's Title<tag class="endtag">title</tag>

  ...
<tag class="endtag">chapter</tag></programlisting>
	</example>

	<para xml:lang="en">A chapter cannot be empty; it must contain elements in
	  addition to <tag>title</tag>.  If you need to
	  include an empty chapter then just use an empty
	  paragraph.</para>

	<example>
	  <title xml:lang="en">Empty Chapters</title>

	  <programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">chapter</tag>
  <tag class="starttag">title</tag>This is An Empty Chapter<tag class="endtag">title</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">para</tag><tag class="endtag">para</tag>
<tag class="endtag">chapter</tag></programlisting>
      </example>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="docbook-markup-sections-below-chapters">
      <title xml:lang="en">Sections Below Chapters</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">In books, chapters may (but do not need to) be broken up
	into sections, subsections, and so on.  In articles, sections
	are the main structural element, and each article must contain
	at least one section.  Use the
	<tag>sect<replaceable>n</replaceable></tag> element.
	The <replaceable>n</replaceable> indicates the section number,
	which identifies the section level.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">The first
	<tag>sect<replaceable>n</replaceable></tag> is
	<tag>sect1</tag>.  You can have one or more of these
	in a chapter.  They can contain one or more
	<tag>sect2</tag> elements, and so on, down to
	<tag>sect5</tag>.</para>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en">Sections in Chapters</title>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">chapter</tag>
  <tag class="starttag">title</tag>A Sample Chapter<tag class="endtag">title</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">para</tag>Some text in the chapter.<tag class="endtag">para</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">sect1</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">title</tag>First Section<tag class="endtag">title</tag>

    …
  <tag class="endtag">sect1</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">sect1</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">title</tag>Second Section<tag class="endtag">title</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">sect2</tag>
      <tag class="starttag">title</tag>First Sub-Section<tag class="endtag">title</tag>

      <tag class="starttag">sect3</tag>
	<tag class="starttag">title</tag>First Sub-Sub-Section<tag class="endtag">title</tag>

	…
      <tag class="endtag">sect3</tag>
    <tag class="endtag">sect2</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">sect2</tag>
      <tag class="starttag">title</tag>Second Sub-Section (1.2.2)<tag class="endtag">title</tag>

      …
    <tag class="endtag">sect2</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">sect1</tag>
<tag class="endtag">chapter</tag></programlisting>
      </example>

      <note>
	<para xml:lang="en">Section numbers are automatically generated and
	  prepended to titles when the document is rendered to an
	  output format.  The generated section numbers and titles
	  from the example above will be:</para>

	<itemizedlist>
	  <listitem>
	    <para xml:lang="en">1.1. First Section</para>
	  </listitem>

	  <listitem>
	    <para xml:lang="en">1.2. Second Section</para>
	  </listitem>

	  <listitem>
	    <para xml:lang="en">1.2.1. First Sub-Section</para>
	  </listitem>

	  <listitem>
	    <para xml:lang="en">1.2.1.1. First Sub-Sub-Section</para>
	  </listitem>

	  <listitem>
	    <para xml:lang="en">1.2.2. Second Sub-Section</para>
	  </listitem>
	</itemizedlist>
      </note>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="docbook-markup-subdividing-part">
      <title xml:lang="en">Subdividing Using <tag>part</tag>
	Elements</title>

      <para xml:lang="en"><tag>part</tag>s introduce another level of
	organization between <tag>book</tag> and
	<tag>chapter</tag> with one or more
	<tag>part</tag>s.  This cannot be done in an
	<tag>article</tag>.</para>

      <programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">part</tag>
  <tag class="starttag">title</tag>Introduction<tag class="endtag">title</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">chapter</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">title</tag>Overview<tag class="endtag">title</tag>

    ...
  <tag class="endtag">chapter</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">chapter</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">title</tag>What is FreeBSD?<tag class="endtag">title</tag>

    ...
  <tag class="endtag">chapter</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">chapter</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">title</tag>History<tag class="endtag">title</tag>

    ...
  <tag class="endtag">chapter</tag>
<tag class="endtag">part</tag></programlisting>
    </sect2>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="docbook-markup-block-elements">
    <title xml:lang="en">Block Elements</title>

    <sect2 xml:id="docbook-markup-paragraphs">
      <title xml:lang="en">Paragraphs</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">DocBook supports three types of paragraphs:
	<tag>formalpara</tag>, <tag>para</tag>, and
	<tag>simpara</tag>.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">Almost all paragraphs in FreeBSD documentation use
	<tag>para</tag>.  <tag>formalpara</tag>
	includes a <tag>title</tag> element, and
	<tag>simpara</tag> disallows some elements from
	within <tag>para</tag>.  Stick with
	<tag>para</tag>.</para>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en"><tag>para</tag> Example</title>

	<para xml:lang="en">Usage:</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">para</tag>This is a paragraph.  It can contain just about any
  other element.<tag class="endtag">para</tag></programlisting>

	<para xml:lang="en">Appearance:</para>

	<para xml:lang="en">This is a paragraph.  It can contain just about any
	  other element.</para>
      </example>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="docbook-markup-block-quotations">
      <title xml:lang="en">Block Quotations</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">A block quotation is an extended quotation from another
	document that should not appear within the current paragraph.
	These are rarely needed.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">Blockquotes can optionally contain a title and an
	attribution (or they can be left untitled and
	unattributed).</para>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en"><tag>blockquote</tag> Example</title>

	<para xml:lang="en">Usage:</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">para</tag>A small excerpt from the US Constitution:<tag class="endtag">para</tag>

<tag class="starttag">blockquote</tag>
  <tag class="starttag">title</tag>Preamble to the Constitution of the United States<tag class="endtag">title</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">attribution</tag>Copied from a web site somewhere<tag class="endtag">attribution</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">para</tag>We the People of the United States, in Order to form a more
    perfect Union, establish Justice, insure domestic Tranquility,
    provide for the common defence, promote the general Welfare, and
    secure the Blessings of Liberty to ourselves and our Posterity, do
    ordain and establish this Constitution for the United States of
    America.<tag class="endtag">para</tag>
<tag class="endtag">blockquote</tag></programlisting>

	<para xml:lang="en">Appearance:</para>

	<para xml:lang="en">A small excerpt from the US Constitution:</para>

	<blockquote>
	  <title xml:lang="en">Preamble to the Constitution of the United
	    States</title>

	  <attribution xml:lang="en">Copied from a web site
	    somewhere</attribution>

	  <para xml:lang="en">We the People of the United States, in Order to form
	    a more perfect Union, establish Justice, insure domestic
	    Tranquility, provide for the common defence, promote the
	    general Welfare, and secure the Blessings of Liberty to
	    ourselves and our Posterity, do ordain and establish
	    this Constitution for the United States of
	    America.</para>
	</blockquote>
      </example>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="docbook-markup-tips-notes">
      <title xml:lang="en">Tips, Notes, Warnings, Cautions, and Important
	Information</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">Extra information may need to be separated from
	the main body of the text.  Typically this is
	<quote>meta</quote> information of which the user should be
	aware.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">Several types of admonitions are available:
	<tag>tip</tag>, <tag>note</tag>,
	<tag>warning</tag>, <tag>caution</tag>, and
	<tag>important</tag>.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">Which admonition to choose depends on the situation.
	The DocBook
	documentation suggests:</para>

      <itemizedlist>
	<listitem>
	  <para xml:lang="en">Note is for information that should be heeded by
	    all readers.</para>
	</listitem>

	<listitem>
	  <para xml:lang="en">Important is a variation on Note.</para>
	</listitem>

	<listitem>
	  <para xml:lang="en">Caution is for information regarding possible data
	    loss or software damage.</para>
	</listitem>

	<listitem>
	  <para xml:lang="en">Warning is for information regarding possible
	    hardware damage or injury to life or limb.</para>
	</listitem>
      </itemizedlist>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en"><tag>tip</tag> and <tag>important</tag> Example</title>

	<para xml:lang="en">Usage:</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">tip</tag>
  <tag class="starttag">para</tag>&amp;os; may reduce stress.<tag class="endtag">para</tag>
<tag class="endtag">tip</tag>

<tag class="starttag">important</tag>
  <tag class="starttag">para</tag>Please use admonitions sparingly.  Too many admonitions
    are visually jarring and can have the opposite of the
    intended effect.<tag class="endtag">para</tag>
<tag class="endtag">important</tag></programlisting>
      </example>

      <para xml:lang="en">Appearance:</para>
      <!-- Need to do this outside of the example -->
      <tip>
	<para xml:lang="en">FreeBSD may reduce stress.</para>
      </tip>

      <important>
	<para xml:lang="en">Please use admonitions sparingly.  Too many admonitions
	  are visually jarring and can have the opposite of the
	  intended effect.</para>
      </important>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="docbook-markup-example">
      <title>舉例</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">Examples can be shown with <tag>example</tag>.</para>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en"><tag>example</tag> Source</title>

	<para xml:lang="en">Usage:</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">example</tag>
  <tag class="starttag">para</tag>Empty files can be created easily:<tag class="endtag">para</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">screen</tag>&amp;prompt.user; <tag class="starttag">userinput</tag>touch file1 file2 file3<tag class="endtag">userinput</tag><tag class="endtag">screen</tag>
<tag class="endtag">example</tag></programlisting>
      </example>

      <!-- Need to do this outside of the example -->
      <para xml:lang="en">Appearance:</para>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en">Rendered <tag>example</tag></title>

	<para xml:lang="en">Empty files can be created easily:</para>

	<screen xml:lang="en"><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>touch file1 file2 file3</userinput></screen>
      </example>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="docbook-markup-lists-and-procedures">
      <title xml:lang="en">Lists and Procedures</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">Information often needs to be presented as lists, or as a
	number of steps that must be carried out in order to
	accomplish a particular goal.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">To do this, use <tag>itemizedlist</tag>,
	<tag>orderedlist</tag>, <tag>variablelist</tag>, or
	<tag>procedure</tag>.  There are other types of list
	elements in DocBook, but we will not cover them here.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en"><tag>itemizedlist</tag> and
	<tag>orderedlist</tag> are similar to their
	counterparts in <acronym>HTML</acronym>, <tag>ul</tag>
	and <tag>ol</tag>.  Each one consists of one or more
	<tag>listitem</tag> elements, and each
	<tag>listitem</tag> contains one or more block
	elements.  The <tag>listitem</tag> elements are
	analogous to <acronym>HTML</acronym>'s <tag>li</tag>
	tags.  However, unlike HTML, they are required.</para>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en"><tag>itemizedlist</tag> and
	  <tag>orderedlist</tag> Example</title>

	<para xml:lang="en">Usage:</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">itemizedlist</tag>
  <tag class="starttag">listitem</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">para</tag>This is the first itemized item.<tag class="endtag">para</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">listitem</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">listitem</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">para</tag>This is the second itemized item.<tag class="endtag">para</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">listitem</tag>
<tag class="endtag">itemizedlist</tag>

<tag class="starttag">orderedlist</tag>
  <tag class="starttag">listitem</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">para</tag>This is the first ordered item.<tag class="endtag">para</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">listitem</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">listitem</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">para</tag>This is the second ordered item.<tag class="endtag">para</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">listitem</tag>
<tag class="endtag">orderedlist</tag></programlisting>

	<para xml:lang="en">Appearance:</para>

	<itemizedlist>
	  <listitem>
	    <para xml:lang="en">This is the first itemized item.</para>
	  </listitem>

	  <listitem>
	    <para xml:lang="en">This is the second itemized item.</para>
	  </listitem>
	</itemizedlist>

	<orderedlist>
	  <listitem>
	    <para xml:lang="en">This is the first ordered item.</para>
	  </listitem>

	  <listitem>
	    <para xml:lang="en">This is the second ordered item.</para>
	  </listitem>
	</orderedlist>
      </example>

      <para xml:id="docbook-markup-varlist" xml:lang="en">An alternate and often
	useful way of presenting information is the
	<tag>variablelist</tag>.  These are lists where each entry has
	a term and a description.  They are well suited for many types
	of descriptions, and present information in a form that is
	often easier for the reader than sections and
	subsections.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">A <tag>variablelist</tag> has a <tag>title</tag>, and then
	pairs of <tag>term</tag> and <tag>listitem</tag>
	entries.</para>

      <example xml:id="docbook-markup-variablelist-example">
	<title xml:lang="en"><tag>variablelist</tag> Example</title>

	<para xml:lang="en">Usage:</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">variablelist</tag>
  <tag class="starttag">varlistentry</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">term</tag>Parallel<tag class="endtag">term</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">listitem</tag>
      <tag class="starttag">para</tag>In parallel communications, groups of bits arrive
	at the same time over multiple communications
	channels.<tag class="endtag">para</tag>
    <tag class="endtag">listitem</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">varlistentry</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">varlistentry</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">term</tag>Serial<tag class="endtag">term</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">listitem</tag>
      <tag class="starttag">para</tag>In serial communications, bits arrive one at a
	time over a single communications
	channel.<tag class="endtag">para</tag>
    <tag class="endtag">listitem</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">varlistentry</tag>
<tag class="endtag">variablelist</tag></programlisting>

	<para xml:lang="en">Appearance:</para>

	<variablelist>
	  <varlistentry>
	    <term xml:lang="en">Parallel</term>

	    <listitem>
	      <para xml:lang="en">In parallel communications, groups of bits arrive
		at the same time over multiple communications
		channels.</para>
	    </listitem>
	  </varlistentry>

	  <varlistentry>
	    <term xml:lang="en">Serial</term>

	    <listitem>
	      <para xml:lang="en">In serial communications, bits arrive one at a
		time over a single communications channel.</para>
	    </listitem>
	  </varlistentry>
	</variablelist>
      </example>

      <para xml:lang="en">A <tag>procedure</tag> shows a series of
	<tag>step</tag>s, which may in turn
	consist of more <tag>step</tag>s or
	<tag>substep</tag>s.  Each <tag>step</tag>
	contains block elements and may include an optional title.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">Sometimes, steps are not sequential, but present a choice:
	do <emphasis>this</emphasis> or do <emphasis>that</emphasis>,
	but not both.  For these alternative choices, use
	<tag>stepalternatives</tag>.</para>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en"><tag>procedure</tag> Example</title>

	<para xml:lang="en">Usage:</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">procedure</tag>
  <tag class="starttag">step</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">para</tag>Do this.<tag class="endtag">para</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">step</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">step</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">para</tag>Then do this.<tag class="endtag">para</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">step</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">step</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">para</tag>And now do this.<tag class="endtag">para</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">step</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">step</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">para</tag>Finally, do one of these.<tag class="endtag">para</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">stepalternatives</tag>
      <tag class="starttag">step</tag>
	<tag class="starttag">para</tag>Go left.<tag class="endtag">para</tag>
      <tag class="endtag">step</tag>

      <tag class="starttag">step</tag>
	<tag class="starttag">para</tag>Go right.<tag class="endtag">para</tag>
      <tag class="endtag">step</tag>
    <tag class="endtag">stepalternatives</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">step</tag>
<tag class="endtag">procedure</tag></programlisting>

	<para xml:lang="en">Appearance:</para>

	<procedure>
	  <step>
	    <para xml:lang="en">Do this.</para>
	  </step>

	  <step>
	    <para xml:lang="en">Then do this.</para>
	  </step>

	  <step>
	    <para xml:lang="en">And now do this.</para>
	  </step>

	  <step>
	    <para xml:lang="en">Finally, do one of these:</para>

	    <stepalternatives>
	      <step>
		<para xml:lang="en">Go left.</para>
	      </step>

	      <step>
		<para xml:lang="en">Go right.</para>
	      </step>
	    </stepalternatives>
	  </step>
	</procedure>
      </example>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="docbook-markup-showing-file-samples">
      <title xml:lang="en">Showing File Samples</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">Fragments of a file (or perhaps a complete file) are shown
	by wrapping them in the <tag>programlisting</tag>
	element.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">White space and line breaks within
	<tag>programlisting</tag> <emphasis>are</emphasis>
	significant.  In particular, this means that the opening tag
	should appear on the same line as the first line of the
	output, and the closing tag should appear on the same line
	as the last line of the output, otherwise spurious blank
	lines may be included.</para>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en"><tag>programlisting</tag> Example</title>

	<para xml:lang="en">Usage:</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">para</tag>When finished, the program will look like
  this:<tag class="endtag">para</tag>

<tag class="starttag">programlisting</tag>#include &amp;lt;stdio.h&amp;gt;

int
main(void)
{
    printf("hello, world\n");
}<tag class="endtag">programlisting</tag></programlisting>

	<para xml:lang="en">Notice how the angle brackets in the
	  <literal>#include</literal> line need to be referenced by
	  their entities instead of being included literally.</para>

	<para xml:lang="en">Appearance:</para>

	<para xml:lang="en">When finished, the program will look like this:</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en">#include &lt;stdio.h&gt;

int
main(void)
{
    printf("hello, world\n");
}</programlisting>
      </example>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="docbook-markup-callouts">
      <title xml:lang="en">Callouts</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">A callout is a visual marker for referring to a
	piece of text or specific position within an
	example.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">Callouts are marked with the <tag>co</tag>
	element.  Each element must have a unique
	<literal>id</literal> assigned to it.  After the example,
	include a <tag>calloutlist</tag> that describes each
	callout.</para>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en"><tag>co</tag> and
	  <tag>calloutlist</tag> Example</title>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">para</tag>When finished, the program will look like
  this:<tag class="endtag">para</tag>

<tag class="starttag">programlisting</tag>#include &amp;lt;stdio.h&amp;gt; <tag class="emptytag">co xml:id="co-ex-include"</tag>

int <tag class="emptytag">co xml:id="co-ex-return"</tag>
main(void)
{
    printf("hello, world\n"); <tag class="emptytag">co xml:id="co-ex-printf"</tag>
}<tag class="endtag">programlisting</tag>

<tag class="starttag">calloutlist</tag>
  <tag class="starttag">callout arearefs="co-ex-include"</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">para</tag>Includes the standard IO header file.<tag class="endtag">para</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">callout</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">callout arearefs="co-ex-return"</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">para</tag>Specifies that <tag class="starttag">function</tag>main()<tag class="endtag">function</tag> returns an
      int.<tag class="endtag">para</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">callout</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">callout arearefs="co-ex-printf"</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">para</tag>The <tag class="starttag">function</tag>printf()<tag class="endtag">function</tag> call that writes
      <tag class="starttag">literal</tag>hello, world<tag class="endtag">literal</tag> to standard output.<tag class="endtag">para</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">callout</tag>
<tag class="endtag">calloutlist</tag></programlisting>

	<para xml:lang="en">Appearance:</para>

	<para xml:lang="en">When finished, the program will look like this:</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en">#include &lt;stdio.h&gt; <co xml:id="co-ex-include"/>

int <co xml:id="co-ex-return"/>
main(void)
{
    printf("hello, world\n"); <co xml:id="co-ex-printf"/>
}</programlisting>

	<calloutlist>
	  <callout arearefs="co-ex-include">
	    <para xml:lang="en">Includes the standard IO header file.</para>
	  </callout>

	  <callout arearefs="co-ex-return">
	    <para xml:lang="en">Specifies that <function>main()</function> returns
	      an int.</para>
	  </callout>

	  <callout arearefs="co-ex-printf">
	    <para xml:lang="en">The <function>printf()</function> call that writes
	      <literal>hello, world</literal> to standard
	      output.</para>
	  </callout>
	</calloutlist>
      </example>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="docbook-markup-tables">
      <title xml:lang="en">Tables</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">Unlike <acronym>HTML</acronym>, DocBook does not need
	tables for layout purposes, as the stylesheet handles those
	issues.  Instead, just use tables for marking up tabular
	data.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">In general terms (and see the DocBook documentation for
	more detail) a table (which can be either formal or informal)
	consists of a <tag>table</tag> element.  This contains
	at least one <tag>tgroup</tag> element, which
	specifies (as an attribute) the number of columns in this
	table group.  Within the tablegroup there is one
	<tag>thead</tag> element, which contains elements for
	the table headings (column headings), and one
	<tag>tbody</tag> which contains the body of the
	table.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">Both <tag>tgroup</tag> and
	<tag>thead</tag> contain <tag>row</tag>
	elements, which in turn contain <tag>entry</tag>
	elements.  Each <tag>entry</tag> element specifies
	one cell in the table.</para>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en"><tag>informaltable</tag> Example</title>

	<para xml:lang="en">Usage:</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">informaltable pgwide="1"</tag>
  <tag class="starttag">tgroup cols="2"</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">thead</tag>
      <tag class="starttag">row</tag>
        <tag class="starttag">entry</tag>This is Column Head 1<tag class="endtag">entry</tag>
        <tag class="starttag">entry</tag>This is Column Head 2<tag class="endtag">entry</tag>
      <tag class="endtag">row</tag>
    <tag class="endtag">thead</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">tbody</tag>
      <tag class="starttag">row</tag>
	<tag class="starttag">entry</tag>Row 1, column 1<tag class="endtag">entry</tag>
	<tag class="starttag">entry</tag>Row 1, column 2<tag class="endtag">entry</tag>
      <tag class="endtag">row</tag>

      <tag class="starttag">row</tag>
	<tag class="starttag">entry</tag>Row 2, column 1<tag class="endtag">entry</tag>
	<tag class="starttag">entry</tag>Row 2, column 2<tag class="endtag">entry</tag>
      <tag class="endtag">row</tag>
    <tag class="endtag">tbody</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">tgroup</tag>
<tag class="endtag">informaltable</tag></programlisting>

	<para xml:lang="en">Appearance:</para>

	<informaltable pgwide="1">
	  <tgroup cols="2">
	    <thead>
	      <row>
		<entry xml:lang="en">This is Column Head 1</entry>
		<entry xml:lang="en">This is Column Head 2</entry>
	      </row>
	    </thead>

	    <tbody>
	      <row>
		<entry xml:lang="en">Row 1, column 1</entry>
		<entry xml:lang="en">Row 1, column 2</entry>
	      </row>

	      <row>
		<entry xml:lang="en">Row 2, column 1</entry>
		<entry xml:lang="en">Row 2, column 2</entry>
	      </row>
	    </tbody>
	  </tgroup>
	</informaltable>
      </example>

      <para xml:lang="en">Always use the <literal>pgwide</literal> attribute with
	a value of <literal>1</literal> with the
	<tag>informaltable</tag> element.  A bug in Internet
	Explorer can cause the table to render incorrectly if this
	is omitted.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">Table borders can be suppressed by setting the
	<literal>frame</literal> attribute to <literal>none</literal>
	in the <tag>informaltable</tag> element.  For example,
	<literal>informaltable frame="none"</literal>.</para>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en">Table with <literal>frame="none"</literal> Example</title>

	<para xml:lang="en">Appearance:</para>

	<informaltable frame="none" pgwide="1">
	  <tgroup cols="2">
	    <thead>
	      <row>
		<entry xml:lang="en">This is Column Head 1</entry>
		<entry xml:lang="en">This is Column Head 2</entry>
	      </row>
	    </thead>

	    <tbody>
	      <row>
		<entry xml:lang="en">Row 1, column 1</entry>
		<entry xml:lang="en">Row 1, column 2</entry>
	      </row>

	      <row>
		<entry xml:lang="en">Row 2, column 1</entry>
		<entry xml:lang="en">Row 2, column 2</entry>
	      </row>
	    </tbody>
	  </tgroup>
	</informaltable>
      </example>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="docbook-markup-examples">
      <title xml:lang="en">Examples for the User to Follow</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">Examples for the user to follow are often necessary.
	Typically, these will consist of dialogs with the computer;
	the user types in a command, the user gets a response back,
	the user types another command, and so on.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">A number of distinct elements and entities come into
	play here.</para>

      <variablelist>
	<varlistentry>
	  <term xml:lang="en"><tag>screen</tag></term>

	  <listitem>
	    <para xml:lang="en">Everything the user sees in this example will be
	      on the computer screen, so the next element is
	      <tag>screen</tag>.</para>

	    <para xml:lang="en">Within <tag>screen</tag>, white space is
	      significant.</para>
	  </listitem>
	</varlistentry>

	<varlistentry>
	  <term xml:lang="en"><tag>prompt</tag>,
	    <literal>&amp;prompt.root;</literal> and
	    <literal>&amp;prompt.user;</literal></term>

	  <listitem>
	    <para xml:lang="en">Some of the things the user will be seeing on the
	      screen are prompts from the computer (either from the
	      operating system, command shell, or application).  These
	      should be marked up using
	      <tag>prompt</tag>.</para>

	    <para xml:lang="en">As a special case, the two shell prompts for the
	      normal user and the root user have been provided as
	      entities.  To indicate the user is at a shell prompt,
	      use one of <literal>&amp;prompt.root;</literal> and
	      <literal>&amp;prompt.user;</literal> as necessary.  They
	      do not need to be inside
	      <tag>prompt</tag>.</para>

	    <note>
	      <para xml:lang="en"><literal>&amp;prompt.root;</literal> and
		<literal>&amp;prompt.user;</literal> are FreeBSD
		extensions to DocBook, and are not part of the
		original <acronym>DTD</acronym>.</para>
	    </note>
	  </listitem>
	</varlistentry>

	<varlistentry>
	  <term xml:lang="en"><tag>userinput</tag></term>

	  <listitem>
	    <para xml:lang="en">When displaying text that the user should type in,
	      wrap it in <tag>userinput</tag> tags.  It will
	      be displayed differently than system output text.</para>
	  </listitem>
	</varlistentry>
      </variablelist>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en"><tag>screen</tag>, <tag>prompt</tag>,
	  and <tag>userinput</tag> Example</title>

	<para xml:lang="en">Usage:</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">screen</tag>&amp;prompt.user; <tag class="starttag">userinput</tag>ls -1<tag class="endtag">userinput</tag>
foo1
foo2
foo3
&amp;prompt.user; <tag class="starttag">userinput</tag>ls -1 | grep foo2<tag class="endtag">userinput</tag>
foo2
&amp;prompt.user; <tag class="starttag">userinput</tag>su<tag class="endtag">userinput</tag>
<tag class="starttag">prompt</tag>Password: <tag class="endtag">prompt</tag>
&amp;prompt.root; <tag class="starttag">userinput</tag>cat foo2<tag class="endtag">userinput</tag>
This is the file called 'foo2'<tag class="endtag">screen</tag></programlisting>

	<para xml:lang="en">Appearance:</para>

	<screen xml:lang="en"><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>ls -1</userinput>
foo1
foo2
foo3
<prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>ls -1 | grep foo2</userinput>
foo2
<prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>su</userinput>
<prompt>Password: </prompt>
<prompt>#</prompt> <userinput>cat foo2</userinput>
This is the file called 'foo2'</screen>
      </example>

      <note>
	<para xml:lang="en">Even though we are displaying the contents of the file
	  <filename>foo2</filename>, it is <emphasis>not</emphasis>
	  marked up as <tag>programlisting</tag>.  Reserve
	  <tag>programlisting</tag> for showing fragments of
	  files outside the context of user actions.</para>
      </note>
    </sect2>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="docbook-markup-inline-elements">
    <title xml:lang="en">In-line Elements</title>

    <sect2 xml:id="docbook-markup-inline-emphasizing">
      <title xml:lang="en">Emphasizing Information</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">To emphasize a particular word or phrase, use
	<tag>emphasis</tag>.  This may be presented as
	italic, or bold, or might be spoken differently with a
	text-to-speech system.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">There is no way to change the presentation of the
	emphasis within the document, no equivalent of
	<acronym>HTML</acronym>'s <tag>b</tag> and
	<tag>i</tag>.  If the information being presented is
	important, then consider presenting it in
	<tag>important</tag> rather than
	<tag>emphasis</tag>.</para>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en"><tag>emphasis</tag> Example</title>

	<para xml:lang="en">Usage:</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">para</tag>&amp;os; is without doubt <tag class="starttag">emphasis</tag>the<tag class="endtag">emphasis</tag>
  premiere &amp;unix;-like operating system for the Intel
  architecture.<tag class="endtag">para</tag></programlisting>

	<para xml:lang="en">Appearance:</para>

	<para xml:lang="en">FreeBSD is without doubt <emphasis>the</emphasis>
	  premiere <trademark class="registered">UNIX</trademark>-like operating system for the Intel
	  architecture.</para>
      </example>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="docbook-markup-acronyms">
      <title xml:lang="en">Acronyms</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">Many computer terms are <emphasis>acronyms</emphasis>,
	words formed from the first letter of each word in a
	phrase.  Acronyms are marked up into
	<tag>acronym</tag> elements.  It is helpful to the
	reader when an acronym is defined on the first use, as shown
	in the example below.</para>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en"><tag>acronym</tag> Example</title>

	<para xml:lang="en">Usage:</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">para</tag>Request For Comments (<tag class="starttag">acronym</tag>RFC<tag class="endtag">acronym</tag>) 1149
  defined the use of avian carriers for transmission of
  Internet Protocol (<tag class="starttag">acronym</tag>IP<tag class="endtag">acronym</tag>) data.  The
  quantity of <tag class="starttag">acronym</tag>IP<tag class="endtag">acronym</tag> data currently
  transmitted in that manner is unknown.<tag class="endtag">para</tag></programlisting>

	<para xml:lang="en">Appearance:</para>

	<para xml:lang="en">Request For Comments (<acronym>RFC</acronym>) 1149
	  defined the use of avian carriers for transmission of
	  Internet Protocol (<acronym>IP</acronym>) data.  The
	  quantity of <acronym>IP</acronym> data currently
	  transmitted in that manner is unknown.</para>
      </example>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="docbook-markup-quotations">
      <title xml:lang="en">Quotations</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">To quote text from another document or source, or to
	denote a phrase that is used figuratively, use
	<tag>quote</tag>.  Most of the markup tags available
	for normal text are also available from within a
	<tag>quote</tag>.</para>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en"><tag>quote</tag> Example</title>

	<para xml:lang="en">Usage:</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">para</tag>However, make sure that the search does not go beyond the
  <tag class="starttag">quote</tag>boundary between local and public administration<tag class="endtag">quote</tag>,
  as <tag class="starttag">acronym</tag>RFC<tag class="endtag">acronym</tag> 1535 calls it.<tag class="endtag">para</tag></programlisting>

	<para xml:lang="en">Appearance:</para>

	<para xml:lang="en">However, make sure that the search does not go beyond
	  the <quote>boundary between local and public
	    administration</quote>, as <acronym>RFC</acronym> 1535
	  calls it.</para>
      </example>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="docbook-markup-keys">
      <title xml:lang="en">Keys, Mouse Buttons, and Combinations</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">To refer to a specific key on the keyboard, use
	<tag>keycap</tag>.  To refer to a mouse button, use
	<tag>mousebutton</tag>.  And to refer to
	combinations of key presses or mouse clicks, wrap them all
	in <tag>keycombo</tag>.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en"><tag>keycombo</tag> has an attribute called
	<literal>action</literal>, which may be one of
	<literal>click</literal>, <literal>double-click</literal>,
	<literal>other</literal>, <literal>press</literal>,
	<literal>seq</literal>, or <literal>simul</literal>.  The
	last two values denote whether the keys or buttons should be
	pressed in sequence, or simultaneously.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">The stylesheets automatically add any connecting
	symbols, such as <literal>+</literal>, between the key
	names, when wrapped in <tag>keycombo</tag>.</para>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en">Keys, Mouse Buttons, and Combinations Example</title>

	<para xml:lang="en">Usage:</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">para</tag>To switch to the second virtual terminal, press
  <tag class="starttag">keycombo action="simul"</tag><tag class="starttag">keycap</tag>Alt<tag class="endtag">keycap</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">keycap</tag>F1<tag class="endtag">keycap</tag><tag class="endtag">keycombo</tag>.<tag class="endtag">para</tag>

<tag class="starttag">para</tag>To exit <tag class="starttag">command</tag>vi<tag class="endtag">command</tag> without saving changes, type
  <tag class="starttag">keycombo action="seq"</tag><tag class="starttag">keycap</tag>Esc<tag class="endtag">keycap</tag><tag class="starttag">keycap</tag>:<tag class="endtag">keycap</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">keycap</tag>q<tag class="endtag">keycap</tag><tag class="starttag">keycap</tag>!<tag class="endtag">keycap</tag><tag class="endtag">keycombo</tag>.<tag class="endtag">para</tag>

<tag class="starttag">para</tag>My window manager is configured so that
  <tag class="starttag">keycombo action="simul"</tag><tag class="starttag">keycap</tag>Alt<tag class="endtag">keycap</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">mousebutton</tag>right<tag class="endtag">mousebutton</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">keycombo</tag> mouse button is used to move windows.<tag class="endtag">para</tag></programlisting>

	<para xml:lang="en">Appearance:</para>

	<para xml:lang="en">To switch to the second virtual terminal, press
	  <keycombo action="simul"><keycap>Alt</keycap>
	    <keycap>F1</keycap></keycombo>.</para>

	<para xml:lang="en">To exit <command>vi</command> without saving changes,
	  type <keycombo action="seq">
	    <keycap>Esc</keycap>
	    <keycap>:</keycap>
	    <keycap>q</keycap>
	    <keycap>!</keycap></keycombo>.</para>

	<para xml:lang="en">My window manager is configured so that
	  <keycombo action="simul">
	    <keycap>Alt</keycap>
	    <mousebutton>right</mousebutton></keycombo> mouse button
	  is used to move windows.</para>
      </example>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="docbook-markup-applications">
      <title xml:lang="en">Applications, Commands, Options, and Cites</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">Both applications and commands are frequently referred to
	when writing documentation.  The distinction between them is
	that an application is the name of a program or suite of
	programs that fulfill a particular task.  A command is the
	filename of a program that the user can type and run at a
	command line.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">It is often necessary to show some of the options that a
	command might take.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">Finally, it is often useful to list a command with its
	manual section number, in the <quote>command(number)</quote>
	format so common in Unix manuals.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">Mark up application names with
	<tag>application</tag>.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">To list a command with its manual section
	number (which should be most of the time) the DocBook
	element is <tag>citerefentry</tag>.  This will
	contain a further two elements,
	<tag>refentrytitle</tag> and
	<tag>manvolnum</tag>.  The content of
	<tag>refentrytitle</tag> is the name of the command,
	and the content of <tag>manvolnum</tag> is the
	manual page section.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">This can be cumbersome to write, and so a series of
	<link linkend="xml-primer-general-entities">general
	  entities</link> have been created to make this easier.
	Each entity takes the form
	<literal>&amp;man.<replaceable>manual-page</replaceable>.<replaceable>manual-section</replaceable>;</literal>.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">The file that contains these entities is in
	<filename>doc/share/xml/man-refs.ent</filename>, and can be
	referred to using this <acronym>FPI</acronym>:</para>

      <programlisting xml:lang="en">PUBLIC "-//FreeBSD//ENTITIES DocBook Manual Page Entities//EN"</programlisting>

      <para xml:lang="en">Therefore, the introduction to FreeBSD documentation will
	usually include this:</para>

      <programlisting xml:lang="en">&lt;!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//FreeBSD//DTD DocBook V4.1-Based Extension//EN" [

&lt;!ENTITY % man PUBLIC "-//FreeBSD//ENTITIES DocBook Manual Page Entities//EN"&gt;
%man;

…

]&gt;</programlisting>

      <para xml:lang="en">Use <tag>command</tag> to include a command
	name <quote>in-line</quote> but present it as something the
	user should type.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">Use <tag>option</tag> to mark up the options
	which will be passed to a command.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">When referring to the same command multiple times in
	close proximity, it is preferred to use the
	<literal>&amp;man.<replaceable>command</replaceable>.<replaceable>section</replaceable>;</literal>
	notation to markup the first reference and use
	<tag>command</tag> to markup subsequent references.
	This makes the generated output, especially
	<acronym>HTML</acronym>, appear visually better.</para>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en">Applications, Commands, and Options Example</title>

	<para xml:lang="en">Usage:</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">para</tag><tag class="starttag">application</tag>Sendmail<tag class="endtag">application</tag> is the most
  widely used Unix mail application.<tag class="starttag">para</tag>

<tag class="starttag">para</tag><tag class="starttag">application</tag>Sendmail<tag class="endtag">application</tag> includes the
  <tag class="starttag">citerefentry</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">refentrytitle</tag>sendmail<tag class="endtag">refentrytitle</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">manvolnum</tag>8<tag class="endtag">manvolnum</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">citerefentry</tag>, &amp;man.mailq.1;, and &amp;man.newaliases.1;
  programs.<tag class="endtag">para</tag>

<tag class="starttag">para</tag>One of the command line parameters to <tag class="starttag">citerefentry</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">refentrytitle</tag>sendmail<tag class="endtag">refentrytitle</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">manvolnum</tag>8<tag class="endtag">manvolnum</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">citerefentry</tag>, <tag class="starttag">option</tag>-bp<tag class="endtag">option</tag>, will display the current
  status of messages in the mail queue.  Check this on the command
  line by running <tag class="starttag">command</tag>sendmail -bp<tag class="endtag">command</tag>.<tag class="endtag">para</tag></programlisting>

	<para xml:lang="en">Appearance:</para>

	<para xml:lang="en"><application>Sendmail</application> is the most widely
	  used Unix mail application.</para>

	<para xml:lang="en"><application>Sendmail</application> includes the
	  <citerefentry>
	    <refentrytitle>sendmail</refentrytitle>
	    <manvolnum>8</manvolnum>
	  </citerefentry>, <citerefentry><refentrytitle>mailq</refentrytitle><manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry>, and <citerefentry><refentrytitle>newaliases</refentrytitle><manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry>
	  programs.</para>

	<para xml:lang="en">One of the command line parameters to
	  <citerefentry>
	    <refentrytitle>sendmail</refentrytitle>
	    <manvolnum>8</manvolnum>
	  </citerefentry>, <option>-bp</option>, will display the
	  current status of messages in the mail queue.  Check this
	  on the command line by running
	  <command>sendmail -bp</command>.</para>
      </example>

      <note>
	<para xml:lang="en">Notice how the
	  <literal>&amp;man.<replaceable>command</replaceable>.<replaceable>section</replaceable>;</literal>
	  notation is easier to follow.</para>
      </note>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="docbook-markup-files">
      <title xml:lang="en">Files, Directories, Extensions, Device Names</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">To refer to the name of a file, a directory, a file
	extension, or a device name, use <tag>filename</tag>.</para>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en"><tag>filename</tag> Example</title>

	<para xml:lang="en">Usage:</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">para</tag>The source for the Handbook in English is found in
  <tag class="starttag">filename</tag>/usr/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/<tag class="endtag">filename</tag>.
  The main file is called <tag class="starttag">filename</tag>book.xml<tag class="endtag">filename</tag>.
  There is also a <tag class="starttag">filename</tag>Makefile<tag class="endtag">filename</tag> and a
  number of files with a <tag class="starttag">filename</tag>.ent<tag class="endtag">filename</tag> extension.<tag class="endtag">para</tag>

<tag class="starttag">para</tag><tag class="starttag">filename</tag>kbd0<tag class="endtag">filename</tag> is the first keyboard detected
  by the system, and appears in
  <tag class="starttag">filename</tag>/dev<tag class="endtag">filename</tag>.<tag class="endtag">para</tag></programlisting>

	<para xml:lang="en">Appearance:</para>

	<para xml:lang="en">The source for the Handbook in English is found in
	  <filename>/usr/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/</filename>.
	  The main file is called <filename>book.xml</filename>.
	  There is also a <filename>Makefile</filename> and a number
	  of files with a <filename>.ent</filename> extension.</para>

	<para xml:lang="en"><filename>kbd0</filename> is the first keyboard detected
	  by the system, and appears in
	  <filename>/dev</filename>.</para>
      </example>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="docbook-markup-name-of-ports">
      <title xml:lang="en">The Name of Ports</title>

      <note>
	<title xml:lang="en">FreeBSD Extension</title>

	<para xml:lang="en">These elements are part of the FreeBSD extension to
	  DocBook, and do not exist in the original DocBook
	  <acronym>DTD</acronym>.</para>
      </note>

      <para xml:lang="en">To include the name of a program from the FreeBSD
	Ports Collection in the document, use the <tag>package</tag>
	tag.  Since the Ports Collection can be installed in any
	number of locations, only include the category and the port
	name; do not include <filename>/usr/ports</filename>.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">By default, <tag>package</tag> refers to a binary package.
	To refer to a port that will be built from source, set the
	<literal>role</literal> attribute to
	<literal>port</literal>.</para>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en"><tag>package</tag> Example</title>

	<para xml:lang="en">Usage:</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">para</tag>Install the <tag class="starttag">package</tag>net/wireshark<tag class="endtag">package</tag> binary
  package to view network traffic.<tag class="endtag">para</tag>

<tag class="starttag">para</tag><tag class="starttag">package role="port"</tag>net/wireshark<tag class="endtag">package</tag> can also be
  built and installed from the Ports Collection.<tag class="endtag">para</tag></programlisting>

	<para xml:lang="en">Appearance:</para>

	<para xml:lang="en">Install the <package>net/wireshark</package> binary
	  package to view network traffic.</para>

	<para xml:lang="en"><package role="port">net/wireshark</package> can also be
	  built and installed from the Ports Collection.</para>
      </example>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="docbook-markup-hosts">
      <title xml:lang="en">Hosts, Domains, IP Addresses, User Names, Group Names,
	and Other System Items</title>

      <note>
	<title xml:lang="en">FreeBSD Extension</title>

	<para xml:lang="en">These elements are part of the FreeBSD extension to
	  DocBook, and do not exist in the original DocBook
	  <acronym>DTD</acronym>.</para>
      </note>

      <para xml:lang="en">Information for <quote>system items</quote> is marked up
	with <tag>systemitem</tag>.  The <literal>class</literal>
	attribute is used to identify the particular type of
	information shown.</para>

      <variablelist>
	<varlistentry>
	  <term xml:lang="en"><literal>class="domainname"</literal></term>

	  <listitem>
	    <para xml:lang="en">The text is a domain name, such as
	      <literal>FreeBSD.org</literal> or
	      <literal>ngo.org.uk</literal>.  There is no hostname
	      component.</para>
	  </listitem>
	</varlistentry>

	<varlistentry>
	  <term xml:lang="en"><literal>class="etheraddress"</literal></term>

	  <listitem>
	    <para xml:lang="en">The text is an Ethernet <acronym>MAC</acronym>
	      address, expressed as a series of 2 digit hexadecimal
	      numbers separated by colons.</para>
	  </listitem>
	</varlistentry>

	<varlistentry>
	  <term xml:lang="en"><literal>class="fqdomainname"</literal></term>

	  <listitem>
	    <para xml:lang="en">The text is a Fully Qualified Domain Name, with
	      both hostname and domain name parts.</para>
	  </listitem>
	</varlistentry>

	<varlistentry>
	  <term xml:lang="en"><literal>class="ipaddress"</literal></term>

	  <listitem>
	    <para xml:lang="en">The text is an <acronym>IP</acronym> address,
	      probably expressed as a dotted quad.</para>
	  </listitem>
	</varlistentry>

	<varlistentry>
	  <term xml:lang="en"><literal>class="netmask"</literal></term>

	  <listitem>
	    <para xml:lang="en">The text is a network mask, which might be
	      expressed as a dotted quad, a hexadecimal string, or as
	      a <literal>/</literal> followed by a number
	      (<acronym>CIDR</acronym> notation).</para>
	  </listitem>
	</varlistentry>

	<varlistentry>
	  <term xml:lang="en"><literal>class="systemname"</literal></term>

	  <listitem>
	    <para xml:lang="en">With <literal>class="systemname"</literal>
	      the marked up information is the simple hostname, such
	      as <literal>freefall</literal> or
	      <literal>wcarchive</literal>.</para>
	  </listitem>
	</varlistentry>

	<varlistentry>
	  <term xml:lang="en"><literal>class="username"</literal></term>

	  <listitem>
	    <para xml:lang="en">The text is a username, like
	      <literal>root</literal>.</para>
	  </listitem>
	</varlistentry>

	<varlistentry>
	  <term xml:lang="en"><literal>class="groupname"</literal></term>

	  <listitem>
	    <para xml:lang="en">The text is a groupname, like
	      <literal>wheel</literal>.</para>
	  </listitem>
	</varlistentry>
      </variablelist>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en"><tag>systemitem</tag> and Classes Example</title>

	<para xml:lang="en">Usage:</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">para</tag>The local machine can always be referred to by the
  name <tag class="starttag">systemitem class="systemname"</tag>localhost<tag class="endtag">systemitem</tag>, which will have the IP
  address <tag class="starttag">systemitem class="ipaddress"</tag>127.0.0.1<tag class="endtag">systemitem</tag>.<tag class="endtag">para</tag>

<tag class="starttag">para</tag>The <tag class="starttag">systemitem class="domainname"</tag>FreeBSD.org<tag class="endtag">systemitem</tag>
  domain contains a number of different hosts, including
  <tag class="starttag">systemitem class="fqdomainname"</tag>freefall.FreeBSD.org<tag class="endtag">systemitem</tag> and
  <tag class="starttag">systemitem class="fqdomainname"</tag>bento.FreeBSD.org<tag class="endtag">systemitem</tag>.<tag class="endtag">para</tag>

<tag class="starttag">para</tag>When adding an <tag class="starttag">acronym</tag>IP<tag class="endtag">acronym</tag> alias to an
  interface (using <tag class="starttag">command</tag>ifconfig<tag class="endtag">command</tag>)
  <tag class="starttag">emphasis</tag>always<tag class="endtag">emphasis</tag> use a netmask of
  <tag class="starttag">systemitem class="netmask"</tag>255.255.255.255<tag class="endtag">systemitem</tag> (which can
  also be expressed as
  <tag class="starttag">systemitem class="netmask"</tag>0xffffffff<tag class="endtag">systemitem</tag>).<tag class="endtag">para</tag>

<tag class="starttag">para</tag>The <tag class="starttag">acronym</tag>MAC<tag class="endtag">acronym</tag> address uniquely identifies
  every network card in existence.  A typical
  <tag class="starttag">acronym</tag>MAC<tag class="endtag">acronym</tag> address looks like
  <tag class="starttag">systemitem class="etheraddress"</tag>08:00:20:87:ef:d0<tag class="endtag">systemitem</tag>.<tag class="endtag">para</tag>

<tag class="starttag">para</tag>To carry out most system administration functions
  requires logging in as <tag class="starttag">systemitem class="username"</tag>root<tag class="endtag">systemitem</tag>.<tag class="endtag">para</tag></programlisting>

	<para xml:lang="en">Appearance:</para>

	<para xml:lang="en">The local machine can always be referred to by the name
	  <systemitem>localhost</systemitem>, which will have the IP
	  address
	  <systemitem class="ipaddress">127.0.0.1</systemitem>.</para>

	<para xml:lang="en">The
	  <systemitem class="fqdomainname">FreeBSD.org</systemitem>
	  domain contains a number of different hosts, including
	  <systemitem class="fqdomainname">freefall.FreeBSD.org</systemitem> and
	  <systemitem class="fqdomainname">bento.FreeBSD.org</systemitem>.</para>

	<para xml:lang="en">When adding an <acronym>IP</acronym> alias to an
	  interface (using <command>ifconfig</command>)
	  <emphasis>always</emphasis> use a netmask of
	  <systemitem class="netmask">255.255.255.255</systemitem>
	  (which can also be expressed as
	  <systemitem class="netmask">0xffffffff</systemitem>).</para>

	<para xml:lang="en">The <acronym>MAC</acronym> address uniquely identifies
	  every network card in existence.  A typical
	  <acronym>MAC</acronym> address looks like <systemitem class="etheraddress">08:00:20:87:ef:d0</systemitem>.</para>

	<para xml:lang="en">To carry out most system administration functions
	  requires logging in as
	  <systemitem class="username">root</systemitem>.</para>
      </example>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="docbook-markup-uri">
      <title xml:lang="en">Uniform Resource Identifiers
	(<acronym>URI</acronym>s)</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">Occasionally it is useful to show a
	Uniform Resource Identifier (<acronym>URI</acronym>) without
	making it an active hyperlink. The <tag>uri</tag> element
	makes this possible:</para>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en"><tag>uri</tag> Example</title>

	<para xml:lang="en">Usage:</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">para</tag>This <acronym>URL</acronym> shows only as text:
  <tag class="starttag">uri</tag>https://www.FreeBSD.org<tag class="endtag">uri</tag>.  It does not
  create a link.<tag class="endtag">para</tag></programlisting>

	<para xml:lang="en">Appearance:</para>

	<para xml:lang="en">This <acronym>URL</acronym> shows only as text:
	  <uri>https://www.FreeBSD.org</uri>.  It does not
	  create a link.</para>
      </example>

      <para xml:lang="en">To create links, see
	<xref linkend="docbook-markup-links"/>.</para>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="docbook-markup-email-addresses">
      <title xml:lang="en">Email Addresses</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">Email addresses are marked up as <tag>email</tag>
	elements.  In the <acronym>HTML</acronym> output format, the
	wrapped text becomes a hyperlink to the email address.  Other
	output formats that support hyperlinks may also make the email
	address into a link.</para>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en"><tag>email</tag> with a Hyperlink Example</title>

	<para xml:lang="en">Usage:</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">para</tag>An email address that does not actually exist, like
  <tag class="starttag">email</tag>notreal@example.com<tag class="endtag">email</tag>, can be used as an
  example.<tag class="endtag">para</tag></programlisting>

	<para xml:lang="en">Appearance:</para>

	<para xml:lang="en">An email address that does not actually exist, like
	  <email>notreal@example.com</email>, can be used as an
	  example.</para>
      </example>

      <para xml:lang="en">A FreeBSD-specific extension allows setting the
	<literal>role</literal> attribute to <literal>nolink</literal>
	to prevent the creation of the hyperlink to the email
	address.</para>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en"><tag>email</tag> Without a Hyperlink Example</title>

	<para xml:lang="en">Usage:</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">para</tag>Sometimes a link to an email address like
  <tag class="starttag">email role="nolink"</tag>notreal@example.com<tag class="endtag">email</tag> is not
  desired.<tag class="endtag">para</tag></programlisting>

	<para xml:lang="en">Appearance:</para>

	<para xml:lang="en">Sometimes a link to an email address like
	  <email role="nolink">notreal@example.com</email> is not
	  desired.</para>
      </example>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="docbook-markup-describing-makefiles">
      <title xml:lang="en">Describing <filename>Makefile</filename>s</title>

      <note>
	<title xml:lang="en">FreeBSD Extension</title>

	<para xml:lang="en">These elements are part of the FreeBSD extension to
	  DocBook, and do not exist in the original DocBook
	  <acronym>DTD</acronym>.</para>
      </note>

      <para xml:lang="en">Two elements exist to describe parts of
	<filename>Makefile</filename>s, <tag>buildtarget</tag>
	and <tag>varname</tag>.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en"><tag>buildtarget</tag> identifies a build target
	exported by a <filename>Makefile</filename> that can be
	given as a parameter to <command>make</command>.
	<tag>varname</tag> identifies a variable that can be
	set (in the environment, on the command line with
	<command>make</command>, or within the
	<filename>Makefile</filename>) to influence the
	process.</para>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en"><tag>buildtarget</tag> and
	  <tag>varname</tag> Example</title>

	<para xml:lang="en">Usage:</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">para</tag>Two common targets in a <tag class="starttag">filename</tag>Makefile<tag class="endtag">filename</tag>
  are <tag class="starttag">buildtarget</tag>all<tag class="endtag">buildtarget</tag> and
  <tag class="starttag">buildtarget</tag>clean<tag class="endtag">buildtarget</tag>.<tag class="endtag">para</tag>

<tag class="starttag">para</tag>Typically, invoking <tag class="starttag">buildtarget</tag>all<tag class="endtag">buildtarget</tag> will
  rebuild the application, and invoking
  <tag class="starttag">buildtarget</tag>clean<tag class="endtag">buildtarget</tag> will remove the temporary
  files (<tag class="starttag">filename</tag>.o<tag class="endtag">filename</tag> for example) created by the
  build process.<tag class="endtag">para</tag>

<tag class="starttag">para</tag><tag class="starttag">buildtarget</tag>clean<tag class="endtag">buildtarget</tag> may be controlled by a
  number of variables, including <tag class="starttag">varname</tag>CLOBBER<tag class="endtag">varname</tag>
  and <tag class="starttag">varname</tag>RECURSE<tag class="endtag">varname</tag>.<tag class="endtag">para</tag></programlisting>

	<para xml:lang="en">Appearance:</para>

	<para xml:lang="en">Two common targets in a <filename>Makefile</filename>
	  are <buildtarget xml:lang="en">all</buildtarget> and
	  <buildtarget xml:lang="en">clean</buildtarget>.</para>

	<para xml:lang="en">Typically, invoking <buildtarget xml:lang="en">all</buildtarget> will
	  rebuild the application, and invoking
	  <buildtarget xml:lang="en">clean</buildtarget> will remove the temporary
	  files (<filename>.o</filename> for example) created by the
	  build process.</para>

	<para xml:lang="en"><buildtarget xml:lang="en">clean</buildtarget> may be controlled by a
	  number of variables, including <varname>CLOBBER</varname>
	  and <varname>RECURSE</varname>.</para>
      </example>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="docbook-markup-literal-text">
      <title xml:lang="en">Literal Text</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">Literal text, or text which should be entered verbatim, is
	often needed in documentation.  This is text that is excerpted
	from another file, or which should be copied exactly as shown
	from the documentation into another file.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">Some of the time, <tag>programlisting</tag> will
	be sufficient to denote this text.  But
	<tag>programlisting</tag> is not always appropriate,
	particularly when you want to include a portion of a file
	<quote>in-line</quote> with the rest of the
	paragraph.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">On these occasions, use
	<tag>literal</tag>.</para>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en"><tag>literal</tag> Example</title>

	<para xml:lang="en">Usage:</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">para</tag>The <tag class="starttag">literal</tag>maxusers 10<tag class="endtag">literal</tag> line in the kernel
  configuration file determines the size of many system tables, and is
  a rough guide to how many simultaneous logins the system will
  support.<tag class="endtag">para</tag></programlisting>

	<para xml:lang="en">Appearance:</para>

	<para xml:lang="en">The <literal>maxusers 10</literal> line in the kernel
	  configuration file determines the size of many system
	  tables, and is a rough guide to how many simultaneous
	  logins the system will support.</para>
      </example>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="docbook-markup-replaceable">
      <title xml:lang="en">Showing Items That the User <emphasis>Must</emphasis>
	Fill In</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">There will often be times when the user is shown
	what to do, or referred to a file or command line, but
	cannot simply copy the example provided.  Instead, they
	must supply some information themselves.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en"><tag>replaceable</tag> is designed for this
	eventuality.  Use it <emphasis>inside</emphasis> other
	elements to indicate parts of that element's content that
	the user must replace.</para>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en"><tag>replaceable</tag> Example</title>

	<para xml:lang="en">Usage:</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">screen</tag>&amp;prompt.user; <tag class="starttag">userinput</tag>man <tag class="starttag">replaceable</tag>command<tag class="endtag">replaceable</tag><tag class="endtag">userinput</tag><tag class="endtag">screen</tag></programlisting>

	<para xml:lang="en">Appearance:</para>

	<informalexample>
	  <screen xml:lang="en"><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>man <replaceable>command</replaceable></userinput></screen>
	</informalexample>

	<para xml:lang="en"><tag>replaceable</tag> can be used in many
	  different elements, including <tag>literal</tag>.
	  This example also shows that <tag>replaceable</tag>
	  should only be wrapped around the content that the user
	  <emphasis>is</emphasis> meant to provide.  The other content
	  should be left alone.</para>

	<para xml:lang="en">Usage:</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">para</tag>The <tag class="starttag">literal</tag>maxusers <tag class="starttag">replaceable</tag>n<tag class="endtag">replaceable</tag><tag class="endtag">literal</tag>
  line in the kernel configuration file determines the size of many system
  tables, and is a rough guide to how many simultaneous logins the system will
  support.<tag class="endtag">para</tag>

<tag class="starttag">para</tag>For a desktop workstation, <tag class="starttag">literal</tag>32<tag class="endtag">literal</tag> is a good value
  for <tag class="starttag">replaceable</tag>n<tag class="endtag">replaceable</tag>.<tag class="endtag">para</tag></programlisting>

	<para xml:lang="en">Appearance:</para>

	<para xml:lang="en">The
	  <literal>maxusers <replaceable>n</replaceable></literal>
	  line in the kernel configuration file determines the size
	  of many system tables, and is a rough guide to how many
	  simultaneous logins the system will support.</para>

	<para xml:lang="en">For a desktop workstation, <literal>32</literal> is a
	  good value for <replaceable>n</replaceable>.</para>
      </example>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="docbook-markup-gui-buttons">
      <title xml:lang="en">Showing <acronym>GUI</acronym> Buttons</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">Buttons presented by a graphical user interface are marked
	with <tag>guibutton</tag>.  To make the text look more
	like a graphical button, brackets and non-breaking spaces are
	added surrounding the text.</para>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en"><tag>guibutton</tag> Example</title>

	<para xml:lang="en">Usage:</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">para</tag>Edit the file, then click
  <tag class="starttag">guibutton</tag>[&amp;nbsp;Save&amp;nbsp;]<tag class="endtag">guibutton</tag> to save the
  changes.<tag class="endtag">para</tag></programlisting>

	<para xml:lang="en">Appearance:</para>

	<para xml:lang="en">Edit the file, then click
	  <guibutton>[ Save ]</guibutton> to save the
	  changes.</para>
      </example>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="docbook-markup-system-errors">
      <title xml:lang="en">Quoting System Errors</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">System errors generated by FreeBSD are marked with
	<tag>errorname</tag>.  This indicates the exact error
	that appears.</para>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en"><tag>errorname</tag> Example</title>

	<para xml:lang="en">Usage:</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">screen</tag><tag class="starttag">errorname</tag>Panic: cannot mount root<tag class="endtag">errorname</tag><tag class="endtag">screen</tag></programlisting>

	<para xml:lang="en">Appearance:</para>

	<informalexample>
	  <screen xml:lang="en"><errorname>Panic: cannot mount root</errorname></screen>
	</informalexample>
      </example>
    </sect2>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="docbook-markup-images">
    <title xml:lang="en">Images</title>

    <important>
      <para xml:lang="en">Image support in the documentation is somewhat
	experimental.  The mechanisms described here are unlikely to
	change, but that is not guaranteed.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">To provide conversion between different image formats, the
	<package>graphics/ImageMagick</package>
	port must be installed.  This port is not included in the
	<package>textproc/docproj</package> meta
	port, and must be installed separately.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">A good example of the use of images is the
	<filename>doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/articles/vm-design/</filename>
	document.  Examine the files in that directory to see how
	these elements are used together.  Build different output
	formats to see how the format determines what images are shown
	in the rendered document.</para>
    </important>

    <sect2 xml:id="docbook-markup-image-formats">
      <title xml:lang="en">Image Formats</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">The following image formats are currently supported.  An
	image file will automatically be converted to bitmap or vector
	image depending on the output document format.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">These are the <emphasis>only</emphasis> formats in which
	images should be committed to the documentation
	repository.</para>

      <variablelist>
	<varlistentry>
	  <term xml:lang="en"><acronym>EPS</acronym> (Encapsulated
	    Postscript)</term>

	  <listitem>
	    <para xml:lang="en">Images that are primarily vector based, such as
	      network diagrams, time lines, and similar, should be in
	      this format.  These images have a
	      <filename>.eps</filename> extension.</para>
	  </listitem>
	</varlistentry>

	<varlistentry>
	  <term xml:lang="en"><acronym>PNG</acronym> (Portable Network
	    Graphic)</term>

	  <listitem>
	    <para xml:lang="en">For bitmaps, such as screen captures, use this
	      format.  These images have the <filename>.png</filename>
	      extension.</para>
	  </listitem>
	</varlistentry>

	<varlistentry>
	  <term xml:lang="en"><acronym>PIC</acronym> (PIC graphics language)</term>

	  <listitem>
	    <para xml:lang="en"><acronym>PIC</acronym> is a language for drawing
	      simple vector-based figures used in the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>pic</refentrytitle><manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry>
	      utility.  These images have the
	      <filename>.pic</filename> extension.</para>
	  </listitem>
	</varlistentry>

	<varlistentry>
	  <term xml:lang="en"><acronym>SCR</acronym> (SCReen capture)</term>

	  <listitem>
	    <para xml:lang="en">This format is specific to screenshots of console
	      output.  The following command generates an SCR file
	      <filename>shot.scr</filename> from video buffer of
	      <filename>/dev/ttyv0</filename>:</para>

	    <screen xml:lang="en"><prompt>#</prompt> <userinput><command>vidcontrol -p</command> &lt; <filename><replaceable>/dev/ttyv0</replaceable></filename> &gt; <filename><replaceable>shot.scr</replaceable></filename></userinput></screen>

	    <para xml:lang="en">This is preferable to <acronym>PNG</acronym> format
	      for screenshots because the <acronym>SCR</acronym> file
	      contains plain text of the command lines so that it can
	      be converted to a <acronym>PNG</acronym> image or a
	      plain text depending on the output document
	      format.</para>
	  </listitem>
	</varlistentry>
      </variablelist>

      <para xml:lang="en">Use the appropriate format for each image.  Documentation
	will often have a mix of <acronym>EPS</acronym> and
	<acronym>PNG</acronym> images.  The
	<filename>Makefile</filename>s ensure that the correct format
	image is chosen depending on the output format used.
	<emphasis>Do not commit the same image to the repository in
	  two different formats</emphasis>.</para>

      <important>
	<para xml:lang="en">The Documentation Project may eventually switch to using
	  the <acronym>SVG</acronym> (Scalable Vector Graphic) format
	  for vector images.  However, the current state of
	  <acronym>SVG</acronym> capable editing tools makes this
	  impractical.</para>
      </important>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="docbook-markup-image-file-locations">
      <title xml:lang="en">Image File Locations</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">Image files can be stored in one of several locations,
	depending on the document and image:</para>

      <itemizedlist>
	<listitem>
	  <para xml:lang="en">In the same directory as the document itself, usually
	    done for articles and small books that keep all their
	    files in a single directory.</para>
	</listitem>

	<listitem>
	  <para xml:lang="en">In a subdirectory of the main document.  Typically
	    done when a large book uses separate subdirectories to
	    organize individual chapters.</para>

	  <para xml:lang="en">When images are stored in a subdirectory of the
	    main document directory, the subdirectory name must be
	    included in their paths in the
	    <filename>Makefile</filename> and the
	    <tag>imagedata</tag> element.</para>
	</listitem>

	<listitem>
	  <para xml:lang="en">In a subdirectory of
	    <filename>doc/share/images</filename> named after the
	    document.  For example, images for the Handbook are stored
	    in <filename>doc/share/images/books/handbook</filename>.
	    Images that work for multiple translations are stored in
	    this upper level of the documentation file tree.
	    Generally, these are images that can be used unchanged in
	    non-English translations of the document.</para>
	</listitem>
      </itemizedlist>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="docbook-markup-image-markup">
      <title xml:lang="en">Image Markup</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">Images are included as part of a <tag>mediaobject</tag>.
	The <tag>mediaobject</tag> can contain other, more specific
	objects.  We are concerned with two, the
	<tag>imageobject</tag> and the <tag>textobject</tag>.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">Include one <tag>imageobject</tag>, and two
	<tag>textobject</tag> elements.  The <tag>imageobject</tag>
	will point to the name of the image file without the
	extension.  The <tag>textobject</tag> elements contain
	information that will be presented to the user as well as, or
	instead of, the image itself.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">Text elements are shown to the reader in several
	situations.  When the document is viewed in
	<acronym>HTML</acronym>, text elements are shown while the
	image is loading, or if the mouse pointer is hovered over the
	image, or if a text-only browser is being used.  In formats
	like plain text where graphics are not possible, the text
	elements are shown instead of the graphical ones.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">This example shows how to include an image called
	<filename>fig1.png</filename> in a document.  The image is a
	rectangle with an A inside it:</para>

      <programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">mediaobject</tag>
  <tag class="starttag">imageobject</tag>
    <tag class="emptytag">imagedata fileref="fig1"</tag> <co xml:id="co-image-ext"/>
  <tag class="endtag">imageobject</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">textobject</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">literallayout class="monospaced"</tag>+---------------+ <co xml:id="co-image-literal"/>
|       A       |
+---------------+<tag class="endtag">literallayout</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">textobject</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">textobject</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">phrase</tag>A picture<tag class="endtag">phrase</tag> <co xml:id="co-image-phrase"/>
  <tag class="endtag">textobject</tag>
<tag class="endtag">mediaobject</tag></programlisting>

      <calloutlist>
	<callout arearefs="co-image-ext">
	  <para xml:lang="en">Include an <tag>imagedata</tag> element
	    inside the <tag>imageobject</tag> element.  The
	    <literal>fileref</literal> attribute should contain the
	    filename of the image to include, without the extension.
	    The stylesheets will work out which extension should be
	    added to the filename automatically.</para>
	</callout>

	<callout arearefs="co-image-literal">

	  <para xml:lang="en">The first <tag>textobject</tag> contains a
	    <tag>literallayout</tag> element, where the
	    <literal>class</literal> attribute is set to
	    <literal>monospaced</literal>.  This is an opportunity to
	    demonstrate <acronym>ASCII</acronym> art skills.  This
	    content will be used if the document is converted to plain
	    text.</para>

	  <para xml:lang="en">Notice how the first and last lines of the content
	    of the <tag>literallayout</tag> element butt up
	    next to the element's tags.  This ensures no extraneous
	    white space is included.</para>
	</callout>

	<callout arearefs="co-image-phrase">
	  <para xml:lang="en">The second <tag>textobject</tag> contains a
	    single <tag>phrase</tag> element.  The contents of
	    this phrase will become the <literal>alt</literal>
	    attribute for the image when this document is converted to
	    <acronym>HTML</acronym>.</para>
	</callout>
      </calloutlist>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="docbook-markup-image-makefile-entries">
      <title xml:lang="en">Image <filename>Makefile</filename> Entries</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">Images must be listed in the <filename>Makefile</filename>
	in the <varname>IMAGES</varname> variable.  This variable must
	contain the names of all the <emphasis>source</emphasis>
	images.  For example, if there are three figures,
	<filename>fig1.eps</filename>, <filename>fig2.png</filename>,
	<filename>fig3.png</filename>, then the
	<filename>Makefile</filename> should have lines like this in
	it.</para>

      <programlisting xml:lang="en">…
IMAGES= fig1.eps fig2.png fig3.png
…</programlisting>

	<para xml:lang="en">or</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en">…
IMAGES=  fig1.eps
IMAGES+= fig2.png
IMAGES+= fig3.png
…</programlisting>

      <para xml:lang="en">Again, the <filename>Makefile</filename> will work out the
	complete list of images it needs to build the source document,
	you only need to list the image files <emphasis>you</emphasis>
	provided.</para>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="docbook-markup-images-in-subdirectories">
      <title xml:lang="en">Images and Chapters in Subdirectories</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">Be careful when separating documentation into smaller
	files in different directories (see <xref linkend="xml-primer-include-using-gen-entities"/>).</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">Suppose there is a book with three chapters, and the
	chapters are stored in their own directories, called
	<filename>chapter1/chapter.xml</filename>,
	<filename>chapter2/chapter.xml</filename>, and
	<filename>chapter3/chapter.xml</filename>.  If each chapter
	has images associated with it, place those images in each
	chapter's subdirectory (<filename>chapter1/</filename>,
	<filename>chapter2/</filename>, and
	<filename>chapter3/</filename>).</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">However, doing this requires including the directory
	names in the <varname>IMAGES</varname> variable in the
	<filename>Makefile</filename>, <emphasis>and</emphasis>
	including the directory name in the <tag>imagedata</tag>
	element in the document.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">For example, if the book has
	<filename>chapter1/fig1.png</filename>, then
	<filename>chapter1/chapter.xml</filename> should
	contain:</para>

      <programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">mediaobject</tag>
  <tag class="starttag">imageobject</tag>
    <tag class="emptytag">imagedata fileref="chapter1/fig1"</tag> <co xml:id="co-image-dir"/>
  <tag class="endtag">imageobject</tag>

  …

<tag class="endtag">mediaobject</tag></programlisting>

      <calloutlist>
	<callout arearefs="co-image-dir">
	  <para xml:lang="en">The directory name must be included in the
	    <literal>fileref</literal> attribute.</para>
	</callout>
      </calloutlist>

      <para xml:lang="en">The <filename>Makefile</filename> must contain:</para>

      <programlisting xml:lang="en">…
IMAGES=  chapter1/fig1.png
…</programlisting>
    </sect2>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="docbook-markup-links">
    <title xml:lang="en">Links</title>

    <note>
      <para xml:lang="en">Links are also in-line elements.  To show a
	<acronym>URI</acronym> without creating a link, see
	<xref linkend="docbook-markup-uri"/>.</para>
    </note>

    <sect2 xml:id="docbook-markup-links-ids">
      <title xml:lang="en"><literal>xml:id</literal> Attributes</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">Most DocBook elements accept an <literal>xml:id</literal>
	attribute to give that part of the document a unique name.
	The <literal>xml:id</literal> can be used as a target for a
	crossreference or link.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">Any portion of the document that will be a link target
	must have an <literal>xml:id</literal> attribute.  Assigning
	an <literal>xml:id</literal> to all chapters and sections,
	even if there are no current plans to link to them, is a good
	idea.  These <literal>xml:id</literal>s can be used as unique
	reference points by anyone referring to the
	<acronym>HTML</acronym> version of the document.</para>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en"><literal>xml:id</literal> on Chapters and
	  Sections Example</title>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">chapter xml:id="introduction"</tag>
  <tag class="starttag">title</tag>Introduction<tag class="endtag">title</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">para</tag>This is the introduction.  It contains a subsection,
    which is identified as well.<tag class="endtag">para</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">sect1 xml:id="introduction-moredetails"</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">title</tag>More Details<tag class="endtag">title</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">para</tag>This is a subsection.<tag class="endtag">para</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">sect1</tag>
<tag class="endtag">chapter</tag></programlisting>
      </example>

      <para xml:lang="en">Use descriptive values for <literal>xml:id</literal>
	names.  The values must be unique within the entire document,
	not just in a single file.  In the example, the subsection
	<literal>xml:id</literal> is constructed by appending text to
	the chapter <literal>xml:id</literal>.  This ensures that the
	<literal>xml:id</literal>s are unique.  It also helps both
	reader and anyone editing the document to see where the link
	is located within the document, similar to a directory path to
	a file.</para>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="docbook-markup-links-crossreferences">
      <title xml:lang="en">Crossreferences with <literal>xref</literal></title>

      <para xml:lang="en"><tag>xref</tag> provides the reader with a link to jump to
	another section of the document.  The target
	<literal>xml:id</literal> is specified in the
	<literal>linkend</literal> attribute, and <tag>xref</tag>
	generates the link text automatically.</para>

      <example>
	<title xml:lang="en"><tag>xref</tag> Example</title>

	<para xml:lang="en">Assume that this fragment appears somewhere in a
	  document that includes the <literal>xml:id</literal>
	  example shown above:</para>

	<programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">para</tag>More information can be found
  in <tag class="emptytag">xref linkend="introduction"</tag>.<tag class="endtag">para</tag>

<tag class="starttag">para</tag>More specific information can be found
  in <tag class="emptytag">xref linkend="introduction-moredetails"</tag>.<tag class="endtag">para</tag></programlisting>

	<para xml:lang="en">The link text will be generated automatically, looking
	  like (<emphasis>emphasized</emphasis> text indicates the
	  link text):</para>

	<blockquote>
	  <para xml:lang="en">More information can be found in <emphasis>Chapter
	      1, Introduction</emphasis>.</para>

	  <para xml:lang="en">More specific information can be found in
	    <emphasis>Section 1.1,
	      <quote>More Details</quote></emphasis>.</para>
	</blockquote>
      </example>

      <para xml:lang="en">The link text is generated automatically from the chapter
	and section number and <literal>title</literal>
	elements.</para>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="docbook-markup-links-to-web-documents">
      <title xml:lang="en">Linking to Other Documents on the
	Web</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">The link element described here allows the writer to
	define the link text.  When link text is used, it is very important to be descriptive
	to give the reader an idea of where the link goes.
	Remember that DocBook can be rendered to multiple
	types of media.  The reader might be looking at a printed book
	or other form of media where there are no links.  If the link
	text is not descriptive enough, the reader might not be able to
	locate the linked section.</para>

	<para xml:lang="en">The <literal>xlink:href</literal> attribute
	  is the <acronym>URL</acronym> of the page,
	  and the content of the element is the text that
	  will be displayed for the user to activate.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">In many situations, it is preferable to show the actual
	<acronym>URL</acronym> rather than text.  This can be done by
	leaving out the element text entirely.</para>

	<example>
	  <title xml:lang="en"><tag>link</tag> to a FreeBSD Documentation Web
	    Page Example</title>

	  <para xml:lang="en">Link to the book or article <acronym>URL</acronym>
	    entity.  To link to a specific chapter in a book, add a
	    slash and the chapter file name, followed by an optional
	    anchor within the chapter.  For articles, link to the
	    article <acronym>URL</acronym> entity, followed by an
	    optional anchor within the article.
	    <acronym>URL</acronym> entities can be found in
	    <filename>doc/share/xml/urls.ent</filename>.</para>

	  <para xml:lang="en">Usage for FreeBSD book links:</para>

	  <programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">para</tag>Read the <tag class="starttag">link
    xlink:href="&amp;url.books.handbook;/svn.html#svn-intro"</tag>SVN
    introduction<tag class="endtag">link</tag>, then pick the nearest mirror from
  the list of <tag class="starttag">link
    xlink:href="&amp;url.books.handbook;/svn.html#svn-mirrors"</tag>Subversion
    mirror sites<tag class="endtag">link</tag>.<tag class="endtag">para</tag></programlisting>

	  <para xml:lang="en">Appearance:</para>

	  <para xml:lang="en">Read the <link xlink:href="@@URL_RELPREFIX@@/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/svn.html#svn-intro">SVN
	      introduction</link>, then pick the nearest mirror from
	    the list of <link xlink:href="@@URL_RELPREFIX@@/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/svn.html#svn-mirrors">Subversion
	      mirror sites</link>.</para>

	  <para xml:lang="en">Usage for FreeBSD article links:</para>

	  <programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">para</tag>Read this
  <tag class="starttag">link xlink:href="&amp;url.articles.bsdl-gpl;"</tag>article
    about the BSD license<tag class="endtag">link</tag>, or just the
  <tag class="starttag">link xlink:href="&amp;url.articles.bsdl-gpl;#intro"</tag>introduction<tag class="endtag">link</tag>.<tag class="endtag">para</tag></programlisting>

	  <para xml:lang="en">Appearance:</para>

	  <para xml:lang="en">Read this
	    <link xlink:href="@@URL_RELPREFIX@@/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/articles/bsdl-gpl">article
	      about the BSD license</link>, or just the <link xlink:href="@@URL_RELPREFIX@@/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/articles/bsdl-gpl#intro">introduction</link>.</para>
	</example>

	<example>
	  <title xml:lang="en"><tag>link</tag> to a FreeBSD Web Page Example</title>

	  <para xml:lang="en">Usage:</para>

	  <programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">para</tag>Of course, you could stop reading this document and go to the
  <tag class="starttag">link xlink:href="&amp;url.base;/index.html"</tag>FreeBSD home page<tag class="endtag">link</tag> instead.<tag class="endtag">para</tag></programlisting>

	  <para xml:lang="en">Appearance:</para>

	  <para xml:lang="en">Of course, you could stop reading this document and go
	    to the <link xlink:href="@@URL_RELPREFIX@@/index.html">FreeBSD
	      home page</link> instead.</para>
	</example>

	<example>
	  <title xml:lang="en"><tag>link</tag> to an External Web
	    Page Example</title>

	  <para xml:lang="en">Usage:</para>

	  <programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">para</tag>Wikipedia has an excellent reference on
  <tag class="starttag">link
    xlink:href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/GUID_Partition_Table"</tag>GUID
    Partition Tables<tag class="endtag">link</tag>.<tag class="endtag">para</tag></programlisting>

	  <para xml:lang="en">Appearance:</para>

	  <para xml:lang="en">Wikipedia has an excellent reference on <link xlink:href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/GUID_Partition_Table">GUID
	      Partition Tables</link>.</para>

	  <para xml:lang="en">The link text can be omitted to show the actual
	    URL:</para>

	  <programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">para</tag>Wikipedia has an excellent reference on
  GUID Partition Tables: <tag class="starttag">link
    xlink:href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/GUID_Partition_Table"</tag><tag class="endtag">link</tag>.<tag class="endtag">para</tag></programlisting>

	  <para xml:lang="en">The same link can be entered using shorter
	    notation instead of a separate ending tag:</para>

	  <programlisting xml:lang="en"><tag class="starttag">para</tag>Wikipedia has an excellent reference on
  GUID Partition Tables: <tag class="emptytag">link
    xlink:href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/GUID_Partition_Table"</tag>.<tag class="endtag">para</tag></programlisting>

	  <para xml:lang="en">The two methods are equivalent.  Appearance:</para>

	  <para xml:lang="en">Wikipedia has an excellent reference on GUID Partition
	    Tables: <uri xlink:href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/GUID_Partition_Table">http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/GUID_Partition_Table</uri>.</para>
	</example>
    </sect2>
  </sect1>
</chapter>

  
<!-- Copyright (c) 1998, 1999 Nik Clayton, All rights reserved.

     Redistribution and use in source (SGML DocBook) and 'compiled' forms
     (SGML HTML, PDF, PostScript, RTF and so forth) with or without
     modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
     are met:

      1. Redistributions of source code (SGML DocBook) must retain the above
         copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
         disclaimer as the first lines of this file unmodified.

      2. Redistributions in compiled form (transformed to other DTDs,
         converted to PDF, PostScript, RTF and other formats) must reproduce
         the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
         following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
         provided with the distribution.

     THIS DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED BY NIK CLAYTON "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR
     IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
     OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
     DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL NIK CLAYTON BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
     INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
     (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
     SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
     HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
     STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
     ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
     POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

     $FreeBSD$
-->
<chapter version="5.0" xml:id="stylesheets">
  <title xml:lang="en">Style Sheets</title>

  <para xml:lang="en"><acronym>XML</acronym> is concerned with content, and says
    nothing about how that content should be presented to the reader
    or rendered on paper.  Multiple <emphasis>style sheet</emphasis>
    languages have been developed to describe visual layout, including
    Extensible Stylesheet Language Transformation
    (<acronym>XSLT</acronym>), Document Style Semantics and
    Specification Language (<acronym>DSSSL</acronym>), and Cascading
    Style Sheets (<acronym>CSS</acronym>).</para>

  <para xml:lang="en">The <acronym>FDP</acronym> documents use
    <acronym>XSLT</acronym> stylesheets to transform DocBook into
    <acronym>XHTML</acronym>, and then <acronym>CSS</acronym>
    formatting is applied to the <acronym>XHTML</acronym> pages.
    Printable output is currently rendered with legacy
    <acronym>DSSSL</acronym> stylesheets, but this will probably
    change in the future.</para>

  <sect1 xml:id="stylesheets-css">
    <title xml:lang="en"><acronym>CSS</acronym></title>

    <para xml:lang="en">Cascading Style Sheets (<acronym>CSS</acronym>) are a
      mechanism for attaching style information (font, weight, size,
      color, and so forth) to elements in an <acronym>XHTML</acronym>
      document without abusing <acronym>XHTML</acronym> to do
      so.</para>

    <sect2>
      <title xml:lang="en">The DocBook Documents</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">The FreeBSD <acronym>XSLT</acronym> and
	<acronym>DSSSL</acronym> stylesheets refer to
	<filename>docbook.css</filename>, which is expected to be
	present in the same directory as the <acronym>XHTML</acronym>
	files.  The project-wide <acronym>CSS</acronym> file is copied
	from <filename>doc/share/misc/docbook.css</filename> when
	documents are converted to <acronym>XHTML</acronym>, and is
	installed automatically.</para>
    </sect2>
  </sect1>
</chapter>

  
<!-- Copyright (c) 1999 Nik Clayton, All rights reserved.

     Redistribution and use in source (SGML DocBook) and 'compiled' forms
     (SGML HTML, PDF, PostScript, RTF and so forth) with or without
     modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
     are met:

      1. Redistributions of source code (SGML DocBook) must retain the above
         copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
         disclaimer as the first lines of this file unmodified.

      2. Redistributions in compiled form (transformed to other DTDs,
         converted to PDF, PostScript, RTF and other formats) must reproduce
         the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
         following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
         provided with the distribution.

     THIS DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED BY NIK CLAYTON "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR
     IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
     OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
     DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL NIK CLAYTON BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
     INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
     (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
     SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
     HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
     STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
     ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
     POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

     $FreeBSD$
-->
<chapter version="5.0" xml:id="translations">
  <title>翻譯</title>

  <para>本章是翻譯 FreeBSD 文件(包含：FAQ, Handbook, tutorials, manual pages等)的常見問題(FAQ)。</para>

  <para>本文件 <emphasis>主要</emphasis>  是以 FreeBSD 德文翻譯計劃的翻譯 FAQ 為母本而來的， 原始撰稿者為 Frank Gründer <email>elwood@mc5sys.in-berlin.de</email>，並由 Bernd Warken <email>bwarken@mayn.de</email> 再翻譯回英文版。</para>

  <para>本 FAQ 是由文件工程團隊 <email>doceng@FreeBSD.org</email> 所維護。</para>

  <qandaset>
    <qandaentry>
      <question>
	<para><phrase>i18n</phrase> 跟 <phrase>l10n</phrase> 是什麼呢？</para>
      </question>

      <answer>
	<para><phrase>i18n</phrase> 是 <phrase>internationalization</phrase> 而 <phrase>l10n</phrase> 是 <phrase>localization</phrase>。這些都是為了書寫方便而用的簡寫。</para>

	<para><phrase>i18n</phrase> 就是開頭為 <quote>i</quote> 後面有 18 個字母，最後接 <quote>n</quote>。同樣地， <phrase>l10n</phrase> 是開頭為 <quote>l</quote> 後面有 10 個字母，最後接 <quote>n</quote>。</para>
      </answer>
    </qandaentry>

    <qandaentry>
      <question>
	<para>有專門給譯者參與討論的 mailing list 嗎？</para>
      </question>

      <answer>
	<para>有的，不同的語系翻譯者都各自有自屬的 mailing lists。這份 <link xlink:href="http://www.freebsd.org/docproj/translations.html"> 翻譯計劃清單</link> 有列出各翻譯計劃的詳細 mailing lists 及相關網站。此外，有一般翻譯討論的<email>freebsd-translators@freebsd.org</email>郵件論壇。</para>
      </answer>
    </qandaentry>

    <qandaentry>
      <question>
	<para>需要更多人一起參與翻譯嗎？</para>
      </question>

      <answer>
	<para>當然囉，越多人參與翻譯，那麼就能夠越快翻完，而且英文版文件若有增減、更新的話， 各翻譯版也可以儘快同步囉。</para>

	<para>不一定得是專業譯者，才能參與翻譯的。</para>
      </answer>
    </qandaentry>

    <qandaentry>
      <question>
	<para>有要求哪些語言能力呢</para>
      </question>

      <answer>
	<para>理論上，必須要對英文非常熟稔，而且很明顯地，對想翻譯的語言必須要能運用自如。</para>

	<para>英文也並非一定要會的。比如說，可以把西班牙文(Spanish)的 FAQ 翻譯為匈牙利文(Hungarian)。</para>
      </answer>
    </qandaentry>

    <qandaentry>
      <question>
	<para>該學會哪些程式的使用呢？</para>
      </question>

      <answer>
	<para>強烈建議在自己機器上也建立 FreeBSD Subversion repository 的備份(至少文件部分)，這可以執行：</para>

	<screen><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>svn checkout https://svn.FreeBSD.org/doc/head/ head</userinput></screen>

	<para><link xlink:href="https://svn.FreeBSD.org/">svn.FreeBSD.org</link>是公共的 <literal>SVN</literal> 伺服器。可以從<link xlink:href="@@URL_RELPREFIX@@/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/svn.html#svn-mirrors">Subversion 鏡相站</link>清單檢查認證的伺服器。</para>

	<note>
	  <para>這需要安裝<package>devel/subversion</package> 套件。</para>
	</note>

	<para>你可以很自在地使用<application>svn</application>。他可以讓你察看文件檔案不同版本之間的修改差異。</para>

	<para>例如你要看<filename>en_US.ISO8859-1/books/fdp-primer/book.xml</filename> 版本<literal>r33733</literal> 和 <literal>r33734</literal> 的差異，請執行：</para>

	<screen><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>svn diff -r<replaceable>33733</replaceable>:<replaceable>33734</replaceable> en_US.ISO8859-1/books/fdp-primer/book.xml</userinput></screen>
      </answer>
    </qandaentry>

    <qandaentry>
      <question>
	<para>要怎麼找出來還有誰要跟我一起翻譯的呢？</para>
      </question>

      <answer>
	<para><link xlink:href="http://www.FreeBSD.org/docproj/translations.html">文件計劃的翻譯 </link> 列了目前已知的各翻譯者成果 ，如果已經有其他人也在做跟你一樣的翻譯工作，那麼請不要重複浪費人力， 請與他們聯繫看看還有哪些地方可以幫上忙的。</para>

	<para>若上面並未列出你母語的翻譯，或是也有人要翻譯但還未公開宣布的話，那麼就寄信到 <link xlink:href="http://lists.FreeBSD.org/mailman/listinfo/freebsd-doc">FreeBSD documentation project 郵遞論壇 </link>。</para>
      </answer>
    </qandaentry>

    <qandaentry>
      <question>
	<para>都沒人翻譯為我所使用的語言，該怎麼辦？</para>
      </question>

      <answer>
	<para>恭喜啊，你剛好踏上 <quote>FreeBSD <replaceable>你的母語</replaceable> 文件翻譯計劃</quote>的啟程之路，歡迎上船。</para>

	<para>首先呢，先判斷是否有妥善規劃時間，因為你只有一個人在翻而已， 因此，相關翻譯成果的公布、與其他可能會幫忙的志工們聯繫這些工作都是你的職責所在。</para>

	<para>寫信到 FreeBSD documentation project 郵遞論壇 向大家宣布你正準備要翻譯，然後文件計劃的翻譯部分就會更新相關資料</para>

	<para>若你的國家已經有人提供 FreeBSD 的 mirror(映設) 服務的話，那麼就先跟他們聯繫， 並詢問你是否在上面可以有網頁空間來放相關計劃資料， 以及是否可以有提供 email 帳號或 mailing list 服務。</para>

	<para>然後，就開始翻文件囉，一開始翻譯的時候，先找些篇幅較短的文件會比較容易些 —— 像是 FAQ 啦，或是如何上手之類的說明文章。</para>
      </answer>
    </qandaentry>

    <qandaentry>
      <question>
	<para>已經翻好一些文件了，該寄到哪呢？</para>
      </question>

      <answer>
	<para>這要看情況而定。 若你是在翻譯團隊內做的話(像是日本、德國)， 他們會有自己內部流程來決定翻譯文件怎麼送，這些大致流程會在他們網頁上面有寫。</para>

	<para>若你是某語系的唯一翻譯者(或你是負責某翻譯計劃，並想把成果回饋給 FreeBSD 計劃) ，那麼你就應該把自己的翻譯成果寄給 FreeBSD 計劃。(細節請看下個問題)</para>
      </answer>
    </qandaentry>

    <qandaentry>
      <question>
	<para>我是該語系的唯一翻譯者，該怎麼把翻譯成果寄出去呢？</para>

	<para xml:lang="en">or</para>

	<para>我們是翻譯團隊，該怎麼把我們成員翻譯成果寄出去呢？</para>
      </question>

      <answer>
	<para>首先，請先確定你的翻譯成果組織條理分明，並可正確編譯，也就是說： 把它擺到現有文件架構內是可以正確編譯成功的。</para>

	<para>目前，FreeBSD 文件都是放在最上層的  <filename>head/</filename> 目錄內。 而該目錄下的則依其語系來做分類命名的，依照 ISO639 定義(在比比 1999/01/20 還新的 FreeBSD 版本的/usr/share/misc/iso639 )。</para>

	<para>若你這個語系可能會有不同編碼方式(像是：中文) 那麼就應該會像下面這樣，來依你所使用的編碼方式細分</para>

	<para>最後，你應該建立好各文件的目錄了。</para>

	<para>舉例來說，假設有瑞典文(Swedish)版的翻譯，那麼應該會長像：</para>

	<programlisting>head/
    sv_SE.ISO8859-1/
                     Makefile
                     htdocs/
                           docproj/
                     books/
                           faq/
                               Makefile
                               book.xml</programlisting>

	<para><literal>sv_SE.ISO8859-1</literal>是依照 <filename><replaceable>語系(lang)</replaceable>.<replaceable>編碼(encoding)</replaceable></filename> 的規則來建立的譯名。 請注意：其中有兩個 Makefiles 檔，它們是用來建構文件的。</para>

	<para>然後請用 <citerefentry><refentrytitle>tar</refentrytitle><manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry>  與 <citerefentry><refentrytitle>gzip</refentrytitle><manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry> 來把你的翻譯文件壓縮起來，並寄到本計劃來。</para>

	<screen><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>cd doc</userinput>
<prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>tar cf swedish-docs.tar sv_SE.ISO8859-1</userinput>
<prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>gzip -9 swedish-docs.tar</userinput></screen>

	<para>接著，把 <filename>swedish-docs.tar.gz</filename> 放到網頁空間上，若你沒有自己網頁空間的話(ISP不提供) ，那麼可以該檔寄到 Documentation Engineering Team <email>doceng@FreeBSD.org</email> 來。</para>

	<para>還有，記得用  Bugzilla  提交一個報告以通知大家；你已經寄出翻譯文件了， 還有，若有人可以幫忙檢閱、複審文件的話，對翻譯品質較好， 因為這也有助於提升翻譯品質的流暢度。</para>

	<para>最後，會有人(可能是文件計劃總管，或是 Documentation Engineering Team <email>doceng@FreeBSD.org</email> 成員) 會檢閱你的翻譯文件，並確認是否可正常編譯。此外，他們會特別注意下列幾點：</para>

	<orderedlist>
	  <listitem>
	    <para>你的檔案是否都有用 RCS tag (像是 "ID" 之類的)？</para>
	  </listitem>

	  <listitem>
	    <para><filename>sv_SE.ISO8859-1</filename> 是否可以順利<command>make all</command> 編譯呢？</para>
	  </listitem>

	  <listitem>
	    <para><command>make install</command> 是否結果有正確</para>
	  </listitem>
	</orderedlist>

	<para>若有問題的話，那麼檢閱者會叮嚀你，來讓這些翻譯成果可以正確使用。</para>

	<para>若沒問題的話，那麼就會很快把你的翻譯成果 commit 進去了。</para>
      </answer>
    </qandaentry>

    <qandaentry>
      <question>
	<para>可以加入某語系或某國家才有的東西到翻譯內容內嗎？</para>
      </question>

      <answer>
	<para>我們希望不要這麼做。</para>

	<para>舉例來說，假設你正準備把 Handbook 翻譯為韓文版， 並希望把韓國零售商也加到你翻譯的 Handbook 韓文版內。</para>

	<para>我們想不出來有啥原因，為什麼不把這些資訊提供給英文版呢？(或是德文、西班牙文、日文等 …) 因為，有可能英語讀者跑去韓國時，會想買 FreeBSD 相關產品。 此外，這也可以提升 FreeBSD 的可見度，很顯然的，這並不是件壞事啊。</para>

	<para>若你有某國才有的資料，請(用  Bugzilla )提供給英文版 Handbook 以作為修訂 ，然後再把英文版的修訂部分，翻為你要翻譯的 Handbook 吧。</para>

	<para>謝謝。</para>
      </answer>
    </qandaentry>

    <qandaentry>
      <question>
	<para>要怎麼把該語系特有的字元寫進去翻譯內容呢？</para>
      </question>

      <answer>
	<para>文件內所有的非 ASCII(Non-ASCII) 字元，都要使用 SGML entities 才能寫進去。</para>

	<para>簡單來說，長相一開頭會是 and 符號(&amp;)，然後是該 entity 名稱，最後接上分號(;)。</para>

	<para>這些 entity 名稱都是 ISO8879 所制訂的，而 port tree 內則 <package>textproc/iso8879</package>。</para>

	<para>以下舉一些例子：</para>

	<segmentedlist>
	  <segtitle>Entity名稱</segtitle>

	  <segtitle>實際樣子</segtitle>

	  <segtitle xml:lang="en">Description</segtitle>

	  <seglistitem>
	    <seg>&amp;eacute;</seg>
	    <seg>é</seg>
	    <seg>小 <quote>e</quote>，並帶尖、重音(acute accent)</seg>
	  </seglistitem>

	  <seglistitem>
	    <seg>&amp;Eacute;</seg>
	    <seg>É</seg>
	    <seg>大  <quote>E</quote>，並帶尖、重音(acute accent)</seg>
	  </seglistitem>

	  <seglistitem>
	    <seg>&amp;uuml;</seg>
	    <seg>ü</seg>
	    <seg>小 <quote>u</quote>，並帶日耳曼語系中的母音變化(umlaut)</seg>
	  </seglistitem>
	</segmentedlist>

	<para>在裝了 iso8879 這個 port 之後，就可以在 <filename>/usr/local/share/xml/iso8879</filename> 找到這些的詳細列表。</para>
      </answer>
    </qandaentry>

    <qandaentry>
      <question>
	<para>如何稱呼讀者呢？</para>
      </question>

      <answer>
	<para>在英文文件內，讀者都是以 <quote>you</quote> 來稱呼，而有些語言並沒有正式/非正式的區隔。</para>

	<para>若你所要翻的語言可以區別這些差異，那麼請用該語系在一般技術文件上所使用的稱呼吧。 如果容易造成困惑的話，那麼請改用較中性的稱呼來取代。</para>
      </answer>
    </qandaentry>

    <qandaentry>
      <question>
	<para>翻譯成果內要不要附上一些其他訊息呢？</para>
      </question>

      <answer>
	<para>要。</para>

	<para>每份英文版原稿的開頭，通常會有像下面的內容：</para>

	<programlisting>&lt;!--
     The FreeBSD Documentation Project

     $FreeBSD$
--&gt;</programlisting>

	<para>實際上的內容可能稍有不同，但每份原稿都會附上 $FreeBSD$ 這一行以及<literal>The FreeBSD Documentation Project</literal> 宣告。 請注意：$FreeBSD 開頭的這行是會由 Subversion 隨著每次異動而自動更改的， 所以，新檔案的話請保持原狀(也就是只要寫 $FreeBSD$ 就好了)。</para>

	<para>翻譯文件中，必須都要有 $FreeBSD$ 這行，並且把 <literal>FreeBSD Documentation Project</literal> 這行改為  <literal>The FreeBSD <replaceable>你的語系</replaceable> Documentation Project</literal>。</para>

	<para>此外，還必須加上第三行來指出你所翻譯的，到底是以英文版原稿的哪一版本為母本所做的翻譯。</para>

	<para>因此呢，西班牙文版(Spanish)的檔案開頭應該是長像這樣：</para>

	<programlisting>&lt;!--
     The FreeBSD Spanish Documentation Project

     $FreeBSD$
     Original revision: r38674
--&gt;</programlisting>
      </answer>
    </qandaentry>
  </qandaset>
</chapter>

  
<!--
    The FreeBSD Documentation Project
    $FreeBSD$
-->
<chapter version="5.0" xml:id="po-translations">

  <title><acronym>PO</acronym> 翻譯</title>

  <sect1 xml:id="po-translations-introduction">
    <title xml:lang="en">Introduction</title>

    <para><link xlink:href="http://www.gnu.org/software/gettext/"><acronym>GNU</acronym> <application>gettext</application></link> 系統提供翻譯者一個簡單的方法來建立和維護文件的翻譯。翻譯的字串從原始文件題取出來到<acronym>PO</acronym> (Portable Object)  檔。字串的翻譯用另外的編輯器輸入。翻譯的字串可以直接使用，或是編譯成原始文件的完整翻譯版本。</para>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="po-translations-quick-start">
    <title>快速上手</title>

    <para xml:lang="en">The procedure shown in
      <xref linkend="overview-quick-start"/> is assumed to have
      already been performed, but the <literal>TRANSLATOR</literal>
      option must be enabled in the
      <package role="port">textproc/docproj</package> port.  If that
      option was not enabled, display the options menu and enable
      it, then reinstall the port:</para>

    <screen><prompt>#</prompt> <userinput>cd /usr/ports/textproc/docproj</userinput>
<prompt>#</prompt> <userinput>make config</userinput>
<prompt>#</prompt> <userinput>make clean deinstall install clean</userinput></screen>

    <para xml:lang="en">This example shows the creation of a Spanish translation of
      the short <link xlink:href="@@URL_RELPREFIX@@/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/articles/leap-seconds">Leap
	Seconds</link> article.</para>

    <procedure xml:id="po-translations-quick-start-install-po-editor">
      <title xml:lang="en">Install a <acronym>PO</acronym> Editor</title>

      <step>
	<para>編輯翻譯檔案需要<acronym>PO</acronym>編輯器。這個範例使用<package role="ports">editors/poedit</package>。</para>

	<screen><prompt>#</prompt> <userinput>cd /usr/ports/editors/poedit</userinput>
<prompt>#</prompt> <userinput>make install clean</userinput></screen>
      </step>
    </procedure>

    <procedure xml:id="po-translations-quick-start-initial-setup">
      <title xml:lang="en">Initial Setup</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">When a new translation is first created, the directory
	structure and <filename>Makefile</filename> must be created or
	copied from the English original:</para>

      <step>
	<para>建立新翻譯的目錄。英文文章原始碼位於 <filename>~/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/articles/leap-seconds/</filename> 。西班牙文翻譯將會放在 <filename>~/doc/es_ES.ISO8859-1/articles/leap-seconds/</filename> 。除了語系目錄的名稱外，其他路徑相同。</para>

	<screen><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>svn mkdir --parents ~/doc/es_ES.ISO8859-1/articles/leap-seconds/</userinput></screen>
      </step>

      <step>
	<para>從原始文件處將 <filename>Makefile</filename>  複製到翻譯目錄。</para>

	<screen><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>svn cp ~/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/articles/leap-seconds/Makefile \
    ~/doc/es_ES.ISO8859-1/articles/leap-seconds/</userinput></screen>
      </step>
    </procedure>

    <procedure xml:id="po-translations-quick-start-translation">
      <title>翻譯</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">Translating a document consists of two steps: extracting
	translatable strings from the original document, and entering
	translations for those strings.  These steps are repeated
	until the translator feels that enough of the document has
	been translated to produce a usable translated
	document.</para>

      <step>
	<para>從英文的原始文件提取字串到 <acronym>PO</acronym> 檔：</para>

	<screen><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>cd ~/doc/es_ES.ISO8859-1/articles/leap-seconds/</userinput>
<prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>make po</userinput></screen>
      </step>

      <step>
	<para>使用 <acronym>PO</acronym> 編輯器將翻譯輸入 <acronym>PO</acronym> 檔。有幾個不同的編輯器可以使用。這裡用的是 <package role="port">editors/poedit</package> 的 <filename>poedit</filename> 。</para>

	<para><acronym>PO</acronym>  檔名是兩個字元的語系碼後面接底線和兩個字元的區域碼。以西班牙語來說，檔名是 <filename>es_ES.po</filename> 。</para>

	<screen><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>poedit es_ES.po</userinput></screen>
      </step>
    </procedure>

    <procedure xml:id="po-translations-quick-generating-a-translated-document">
      <title xml:lang="en">Generating a Translated Document</title>

      <step>
	<para>產生翻譯文件</para>

	<screen><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>cd ~/doc/es_ES.ISO8859-1/articles/leap-seconds/</userinput>
<prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>make tran</userinput></screen>

	<para>產生的文件名稱與英文原始文件名稱相符，文章通常是 <filename>article.xml</filename> ，書籍是 <filename>book.xml</filename> 。</para>
      </step>

      <step>
	<para>可以轉換成 <acronym>HTML</acronym> 來檢查產生的檔案，並用瀏覽器來察看。</para>

	<screen><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>make FORMATS=html</userinput>
<prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>firefox article.html</userinput></screen>
      </step>
    </procedure>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="po-translations-creating">
    <title>建立新翻譯</title>

    <para xml:lang="en">The first step to creating a new translated document is
      locating or creating a directory to hold it.  FreeBSD puts
      translated documents in a subdirectory named for their
      language and region in the format
      <filename><replaceable>lang</replaceable>_<replaceable>REGION</replaceable></filename>.
      <replaceable>lang</replaceable> is a two-character lowercase
      code.  It is followed by an underscore character and then the
      two-character uppercase <replaceable>REGION</replaceable>
      code.</para>

    <table xml:id="po-translations-language-names" frame="none">
      <title>語系名稱</title>

      <tgroup cols="5">
	<thead>
	  <row>
	    <entry>語言</entry>
	    <entry>地區</entry>
	    <entry>翻譯目錄名稱</entry>
	    <entry><acronym>PO</acronym> 檔名稱</entry>
	    <entry>字元集</entry>
	  </row>
	</thead>

	<tbody>
	  <row>
	    <entry>英文</entry>
	    <entry>美國</entry>
	    <entry><filename>en_US.ISO8859-1</filename></entry>
	    <entry><filename>en_US.po</filename></entry>
	    <entry><acronym>ISO</acronym> 8859-1</entry>
	  </row>

	  <row>
	    <entry>孟加拉文</entry>
	    <entry>孟加拉</entry>
	    <entry><filename>bn_BD.UTF-8</filename></entry>
	    <entry><filename>bn_BD.po</filename></entry>
	    <entry><acronym>UTF</acronym>-8</entry>
	  </row>

	  <row>
	    <entry>丹麥文</entry>
	    <entry>丹麥</entry>
	    <entry><filename>da_DK.ISO8859-1</filename></entry>
	    <entry><filename>da_DK.po</filename></entry>
	    <entry><acronym>ISO</acronym> 8859-1</entry>
	  </row>

	  <row>
	    <entry>德文</entry>
	    <entry>德國</entry>
	    <entry><filename>de_DE.ISO8859-1</filename></entry>
	    <entry><filename>de_DE.po</filename></entry>
	    <entry><acronym>ISO</acronym> 8859-1</entry>
	  </row>

	  <row>
	    <entry>希臘文</entry>
	    <entry>希臘</entry>
	    <entry><filename>el_GR.ISO8859-7</filename></entry>
	    <entry><filename>el_GR.po</filename></entry>
	    <entry><acronym>ISO</acronym> 8859-7</entry>
	  </row>

	  <row>
	    <entry>西班牙文</entry>
	    <entry>西班牙</entry>
	    <entry><filename>es_ES.ISO8859-1</filename></entry>
	    <entry><filename>es_ES.po</filename></entry>
	    <entry><acronym>ISO</acronym> 8859-1</entry>
	  </row>

	  <row>
	    <entry>法文</entry>
	    <entry>法國</entry>
	    <entry><filename>fr_FR.ISO8859-1</filename></entry>
	    <entry><filename>fr_FR.po</filename></entry>
	    <entry><acronym>ISO</acronym> 8859-1</entry>
	  </row>

	  <row>
	    <entry>匈牙利文</entry>
	    <entry>匈牙利</entry>
	    <entry><filename>hu_HU.ISO8859-2</filename></entry>
	    <entry><filename>hu_HU.po</filename></entry>
	    <entry><acronym>ISO</acronym> 8859-2</entry>
	  </row>

	  <row>
	    <entry>義大利文</entry>
	    <entry>義大利</entry>
	    <entry><filename>it_IT.ISO8859-15</filename></entry>
	    <entry><filename>it_IT.po</filename></entry>
	    <entry><acronym>ISO</acronym> 8859-15</entry>
	  </row>

	  <row>
	    <entry>日文</entry>
	    <entry>日本</entry>
	    <entry><filename>ja_JP.eucJP</filename></entry>
	    <entry><filename>ja_JP.po</filename></entry>
	    <entry><acronym>EUC</acronym> JP</entry>
	  </row>

	  <row>
	    <entry>韓文</entry>
	    <entry>韓國</entry>
	    <entry><filename>ko_KR.UTF-8</filename></entry>
	    <entry><filename>ko_KR.po</filename></entry>
	    <entry><acronym>UTF</acronym>-8</entry>
	  </row>

	  <row>
	    <entry>蒙古文</entry>
	    <entry>蒙古</entry>
	    <entry><filename>mn_MN.UTF-8</filename></entry>
	    <entry><filename>mn_MN.po</filename></entry>
	    <entry><acronym>UTF</acronym>-8</entry>
	  </row>

	  <row>
	    <entry>荷蘭文</entry>
	    <entry>荷蘭</entry>
	    <entry><filename>nl_NL.ISO8859-1</filename></entry>
	    <entry><filename>nl_NL.po</filename></entry>
	    <entry><acronym>ISO</acronym> 8859-1</entry>
	  </row>

	  <row>
	    <entry>挪威文</entry>
	    <entry>挪威</entry>
	    <entry><filename>no_NO.ISO8859-1</filename></entry>
	    <entry><filename>no_NO.po</filename></entry>
	    <entry><acronym>ISO</acronym> 8859-1</entry>
	  </row>

	  <row>
	    <entry>波蘭文</entry>
	    <entry>波蘭</entry>
	    <entry><filename>pl_PL.ISO8859-2</filename></entry>
	    <entry><filename>pl_PL.po</filename></entry>
	    <entry><acronym>ISO</acronym> 8859-2</entry>
	  </row>

	  <row>
	    <entry>葡萄牙文</entry>
	    <entry>巴西</entry>
	    <entry><filename>pt_BR.ISO8859-1</filename></entry>
	    <entry><filename>pt_BR.po</filename></entry>
	    <entry><acronym>ISO</acronym> 8859-1</entry>
	  </row>

	  <row>
	    <entry>俄文</entry>
	    <entry>俄羅斯</entry>
	    <entry><filename>ru_RU.KOI8-R</filename></entry>
	    <entry><filename>ru_RU.po</filename></entry>
	    <entry><acronym>KOI</acronym>8-R</entry>
	  </row>

	  <row>
	    <entry>賽爾維亞</entry>
	    <entry>賽爾維亞文</entry>
	    <entry><filename>sr_YU.ISO8859-2</filename></entry>
	    <entry><filename>sr_YU.po</filename></entry>
	    <entry><acronym>ISO</acronym> 8859-2</entry>
	  </row>

	  <row>
	    <entry>土耳其文</entry>
	    <entry>土耳其</entry>
	    <entry><filename>tr_TR.ISO8859-9</filename></entry>
	    <entry><filename>tr_TR.po</filename></entry>
	    <entry><acronym>ISO</acronym> 8859-9</entry>
	  </row>

	  <row>
	    <entry>中文</entry>
	    <entry>中國</entry>
	    <entry><filename>zh_CN.UTF-8</filename></entry>
	    <entry><filename>zh_CN.po</filename></entry>
	    <entry><acronym>UTF</acronym>-8</entry>
	  </row>

	  <row>
	    <entry>中文</entry>
	    <entry>台灣</entry>
	    <entry><filename>zh_TW.UTF-8</filename></entry>
	    <entry><filename>zh_TW.po</filename></entry>
	    <entry><acronym>UTF</acronym>-8</entry>
	  </row>
	</tbody>
      </tgroup>
    </table>

    <para>翻譯位於主要文件目錄的子目錄，這裡假設如 <xref linkend="overview-quick-start"/> 所示，是 <filename>~/doc/</filename>。例如德文位於 <filename>~/doc/de_DE.ISO8859-1/</filename>， 法文位於 <filename>~/doc/fr_FR.ISO8859-1/</filename>。</para>

    <para>每個語系目錄包含不同文件類型的子目錄，通常是 <filename>articles/</filename> 和 <filename>books/</filename>。</para>

    <para>將目錄名稱組合起來就是文章或書的完整路徑。例如，NanoBSD 文章的法語翻譯在 <filename>~/doc/fr_FR.ISO8859-1/articles/nanobsd/</filename> 。而使用手冊的蒙古文翻譯在<filename>~/doc/mn_MN.UTF-8/books/handbook/</filename> 。</para>

    <para>當翻譯到一個新語系時必須建立一個新的語系目錄。如果語系目錄已經存在，那只需要有 <filename>articles/</filename> 或 <filename>books/</filename> 的子目錄。</para>

    <para>FreeBSD 文件的編譯是由同一個目錄的 <filename>Makefile</filename> 控制。簡單的文章可以從原始的英語目錄直接複製 <filename>Makefile</filename> 過來。書籍的翻譯流程結合多個獨立的 <filename>book.xml</filename> 和 <filename>chapter.xml</filename> 成為一個檔案， 所以書籍翻譯的 <filename>Makefile</filename> 必須複製並修改。</para>

    <example xml:id="po-translations-creating-example">
      <title xml:lang="en">Creating a Spanish Translation of the Porter's
	Handbook</title>

      <para>建立<link xlink:href="@@URL_RELPREFIX@@/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/porters-handbook">Porter 手冊</link>的西班牙文翻譯。原文是位於 <filename>~/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/porters-handbook/</filename>  的書籍。</para>

      <procedure>
	<step>
	  <para>西班牙文 books 目錄  <filename>~/doc/es_ES.ISO8859-1/books/</filename> 已經存在，所以只要建立  Porter 手冊的子目錄：</para>
	  <screen><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>cd ~/doc/es_ES.ISO8859-1/books/</userinput>
<prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>svn mkdir porters-handbook</userinput>
A         porters-handbook</screen>
	</step>

	<step>
	  <para>從原始文件的目錄複製  <filename>Makefile</filename>  ：</para>

	  <screen><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>cd ~/doc/es_ES.ISO8859-1/books/porters-handbook</userinput>
<prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>svn cp ~/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/porters-handbook/Makefile .</userinput>
A         Makefile</screen>

	  <para>修改 <filename>Makefile</filename> 內容以產生單一的 <filename>book.xml</filename>：</para>

	  <programlisting>#
# $FreeBSD$
#
# Build the FreeBSD Porter's Handbook。
#

MAINTAINER=doc@FreeBSD.org

DOC?= book

FORMATS?= html-split

INSTALL_COMPRESSED?= gz
INSTALL_ONLY_COMPRESSED?=

# XML content
SRCS=  book.xml

# Images from the cross-document image library
IMAGES_LIB+=    callouts/1.png
IMAGES_LIB+=    callouts/2.png
IMAGES_LIB+=    callouts/3.png
IMAGES_LIB+=    callouts/4.png
IMAGES_LIB+=    callouts/5.png
IMAGES_LIB+=    callouts/6.png
IMAGES_LIB+=    callouts/7.png
IMAGES_LIB+=    callouts/8.png
IMAGES_LIB+=    callouts/9.png
IMAGES_LIB+=    callouts/10.png
IMAGES_LIB+=    callouts/11.png
IMAGES_LIB+=    callouts/12.png
IMAGES_LIB+=    callouts/13.png
IMAGES_LIB+=    callouts/14.png
IMAGES_LIB+=    callouts/15.png
IMAGES_LIB+=    callouts/16.png
IMAGES_LIB+=    callouts/17.png
IMAGES_LIB+=    callouts/18.png
IMAGES_LIB+=    callouts/19.png
IMAGES_LIB+=    callouts/20.png
IMAGES_LIB+=    callouts/21.png

URL_RELPREFIX?= ../../../..
DOC_PREFIX?= ${.CURDIR}/../../..

.include "${DOC_PREFIX}/share/mk/doc.project.mk"</programlisting>

	  <para xml:lang="en">Now the document structure is ready for the translator
	    to begin translating with
	    <command>make po</command>.</para>
	</step>
      </procedure>
    </example>

    <example xml:id="po-translations-creating-example-french">
      <title>建立 <acronym>PGP</acronym> 金鑰文章的法語翻譯。</title>

      <para>建立 <link xlink:href="@@URL_RELPREFIX@@/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/articles/pgpkeys"><acronym>PGP</acronym> 金鑰文章</link>的法文翻譯。原文是位於 <filename>~/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/articles/pgpkeys/</filename> 的文章。</para>

      <procedure>
	<step>
	  <para>法文 article 目錄  <filename>~/doc/fr_FR.ISO8859-1/articles/</filename> 已經存在，所以只要建立  <acronym>PGP</acronym>  金鑰文章的子目錄：</para>
	  <screen><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>cd ~/doc/fr_FR.ISO8859-1/articles/</userinput>
<prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>svn mkdir pgpkeys</userinput>
A         pgpkeys</screen>
	</step>

	<step>
	  <para>從原始文件的目錄複製  <filename>Makefile</filename>  ：</para>

	  <screen><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>cd ~/doc/fr_FR.ISO8859-1/articles/pgpkeys</userinput>
<prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>svn cp ~/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/articles/pgpkeys/Makefile .</userinput>
A         Makefile</screen>

	  <para>檢查 <filename>Makefile</filename> 的內容。因為這是簡單的文章，此例的  <filename>Makefile</filename> 不用修改。第二行的 <literal>$FreeBSD...$</literal> 版本字串將會在檔案提交時被版本控制系統替換掉。</para>

	  <programlisting>#
# $FreeBSD$
#
# Article：PGP Keys

DOC?= article

FORMATS?= html
WITH_ARTICLE_TOC?= YES

INSTALL_COMPRESSED?= gz
INSTALL_ONLY_COMPRESSED?=

SRCS=   article.xml

# To build with just key fingerprints, set FINGERPRINTS_ONLY。

URL_RELPREFIX?= ../../../..
DOC_PREFIX?=    ${.CURDIR}/../../..

.include "${DOC_PREFIX}/share/mk/doc.project.mk"</programlisting>

	  <para>文章結構處理好後，  可以執行建立 <command>make po</command> 建立 <acronym>PO</acronym> 檔。</para>
	</step>
      </procedure>
    </example>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="po-translations-translating">
    <title xml:lang="en">Translating</title>

    <para><application>gettext</application>系統大幅減少翻譯者要追蹤的事情。 字串從原始文件提取到<acronym>PO</acronym> 檔。再用 <acronym>PO</acronym> 檔編輯器輸入字串的翻譯。</para>

    <para>FreeBSD <acronym>PO</acronym> 翻譯系統不會覆蓋掉 <acronym>PO</acronym> 檔。所以提取步驟可以在任何時候重複執行來更新 <acronym>PO</acronym> 檔。</para>

    <para>用  <acronym>PO</acronym> 檔編輯器來編輯檔案。此例是用 <package role="port">editors/poedit</package>，因為它很簡單而且系統需求低。其他的 <acronym>PO</acronym> 檔編輯器提供一些特點，能使翻譯工作更輕鬆。Ports 裡有數個編輯器，包括 <package role="port">devel/gtranslator</package> 。</para>

    <para>保留 <acronym>PO</acronym> 檔是很重要的。它包含所有的翻譯成果。</para>

    <example xml:id="po-translations-translating-example">
      <title>翻譯 Porter 手冊到西班牙文</title>

      <para>輸入 Porter 手冊的西班牙文內容</para>

      <procedure>
	<step>
	  <para>切換到西班牙文 Porter 手冊的目錄並更新 <acronym>PO</acronym> 檔。產生的 <acronym>PO</acronym> 檔如 <xref linkend="po-translations-language-names"/> 所示，名叫 <filename>es_ES.po</filename> 。</para>

	  <screen><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>cd ~/doc/es_ES.ISO8859-1/books/porters-handbook</userinput>
<prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>make po</userinput></screen>
	</step>

	<step>
	  <para>使用  <acronym>PO</acronym> 檔編輯器輸入翻譯：</para>

	  <screen><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>poedit es_ES.po</userinput></screen>
	</step>
      </procedure>
    </example>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="po-translations-tips">
    <title xml:lang="en">Tips for Translators</title>

    <sect2 xml:id="po-translations-tips-xmltags">
      <title>保留 <acronym>XML</acronym> 標籤</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">Preserve <acronym>XML</acronym> tags that are shown in
	the English original.</para>

      <example>
	<title>保留 <acronym>XML</acronym> 標籤</title>

	<para>英文原文：</para>

	<programlisting>If <tag class="starttag">acronym</tag>NTP<tag class="endtag">acronym</tag> is not being used</programlisting>

	<para>西班牙文翻譯：</para>

	<programlisting>Si <tag class="starttag">acronym</tag>NTP<tag class="endtag">acronym</tag> no se utiliza</programlisting>
      </example>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="po-translations-tips-spaces">
      <title>保留空白</title>

      <para>保留要翻譯字串前後的空白。翻譯的版本也要有這些空白。</para>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="po-translations-tips-verbatim">
      <title>不要翻譯的標籤</title>

      <para>有些標籤的內容要一字不差地保留，不要翻譯。</para>

      <itemizedlist xml:id="po-translations-tips-verbatim-list">
	<listitem>
	  <para><tag class="starttag">citerefentry</tag></para>
	</listitem>

	<listitem>
	  <para><tag class="starttag">command</tag></para>
	</listitem>

	<listitem>
	  <para><tag class="starttag">filename</tag></para>
	</listitem>

	<listitem>
	  <para><tag class="starttag">literal</tag></para>
	</listitem>

	<listitem>
	  <para><tag class="starttag">manvolnum</tag></para>
	</listitem>

	<listitem>
	  <para><tag class="starttag">orgname</tag></para>
	</listitem>

	<listitem>
	  <para><tag class="starttag">package</tag></para>
	</listitem>

	<listitem>
	  <para><tag class="starttag">programlisting</tag></para>
	</listitem>

	<listitem>
	  <para><tag class="starttag">prompt</tag></para>
	</listitem>

	<listitem>
	  <para><tag class="starttag">refentrytitle</tag></para>
	</listitem>

	<listitem>
	  <para><tag class="starttag">screen</tag></para>
	</listitem>

	<listitem>
	  <para><tag class="starttag">userinput</tag></para>
	</listitem>

	<listitem>
	  <para><tag class="starttag">varname</tag></para>
	</listitem>
      </itemizedlist>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="po-translations-literal-dollar">
      <title><literal>$FreeBSD$</literal> 字串</title>

      <para>檔案裡的 $FreeBSD$ 版本字串需要特別處理。例如 <xref linkend="po-translations-creating-example"/> 裡，這些字串不是要被展開 (expanded)。英文文件使用 <literal>&amp;dollar;</literal> entities 來避免使用實際的金錢符號。</para>

      <programlisting>&amp;dollar;FreeBSD&amp;dollar;</programlisting>

      <para>版本控制符號不會把 <literal>&amp;dollar;</literal> entities  看成金錢符號，所以不會把字串展開成版本字串。</para>

      <para>當 <acronym>PO</acronym> 檔建立後，範例中的 <literal>&amp;dollar;</literal> entities 被實際的金錢符號取代。當檔案提交時，產生的 <literal>$FreeBSD$</literal>  將會被版本控制系統展開。</para>

      <para>英文文件用的相同技術可以被用在翻譯上。翻譯時用 <literal>&amp;dollar;</literal> 來取代金錢符號，輸入到  <acronym>PO</acronym> 檔編輯器：</para>

      <programlisting>&amp;dollar;FreeBSD&amp;dollar;</programlisting>
    </sect2>

    <!--
    <sect2 xml:id="po-translations-tips-makefile">
      <title>Modifying the <filename>Makefile</filename></title>

      <para>What needs to be changed in the
	<filename>Makefile</filename>?</para>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="po-translations-tips-locale">
      <title>Setting Locales for Editing</title>

      <para>Locale settings so the <acronym>PO</acronym> editor works
	correctly?</para>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="po-translations-tips-poeditors">
      <title>Settings for Specific <acronym>PO</acronym>
	Editors</title>

      <para>Per bcr: turn off "intelligent quotes" in
	Mac poedit.</para>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="po-translations-tips-tm">
      <title>Using Translation Memory</title>

      <para>Using translation memory.  Saving, updating, sharing
	with other members of a translation team.</para>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="po-translations-tips-submitting">
      <title>Submitting Translations</title>

      <para>Submitting translations as diffs, committing
	<acronym>PO</acronym> files.</para>
    </sect2>
    -->
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="po-translations-building">
    <title>編譯翻譯的文件</title>

    <para>原文的翻譯版本可以在任何時候被建立。未翻譯的部份會以英文呈獻。大部份 <acronym>PO</acronym> 編輯器有指標可以顯示翻譯完成度。這讓翻譯者更容易看翻譯好的字串是否足夠來編譯最終的文件。</para>

    <example xml:id="po-translations-building-example">
      <title xml:lang="en">Building the Spanish Porter's Handbook</title>

      <para>編譯和預覽之前範例翻譯的西班牙文版  Porter 手冊</para>

      <procedure>
	<step>
	  <para>編譯翻譯好的文件。因為原文是書籍，所以產生的文件是<filename>book.xml</filename>。</para>

	  <screen><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>cd ~/doc/es_ES.ISO8859-1/books/porters-handbook</userinput>
<prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>make tran</userinput></screen>
	</step>

	<step>
	  <para>轉換翻譯好的<filename>book.xml</filename>成<acronym>HTML</acronym>並用<application>Firefox</application>來瀏覽。這和英文版是相同的步驟，其他 <varname>FORMATS</varname> 也可以這樣做。請見<xref linkend="doc-build-rendering-common-formats"/> 。</para>

	  <screen><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>make FORMATS=html</userinput>
<prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>firefox book.html</userinput></screen>
	</step>
      </procedure>
    </example>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="po-translations-submitting">
    <title>提交新翻譯</title>

    <para>準備要提交的新翻譯。這包含新增檔案到版本控制系統，對檔案設定額外的屬性，並建立 diff 來提交。</para>

    <para>範例中產生的 diff 檔可以被附加到 <link xlink:href="https://bugs.freebsd.org/bugzilla/enter_bug.cgi?product=Documentation">documentation bug report</link> 或 <link xlink:href="https://reviews.freebsd.org/">code review</link> 。</para>

    <example xml:id="po-translations-submitting-spanish">
      <title>NanoBSD 文章的西班牙文翻譯</title>

      <procedure>
	<step>
	  <para>增加 FreeBSD 版本字串註解到 <acronym>PO</acronym> 檔的第一行：</para>

	  <programlisting>#$FreeBSD$</programlisting>
	</step>

	<step>
	  <para>增加 <filename>Makefile</filename> 、<acronym>PO</acronym> 檔和產生的 <acronym>XML</acronym> 翻譯到版本控制系統：</para>

	  <screen><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>cd ~/doc/es_ES.ISO8859-1/articles/nanobsd/</userinput>
<prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>ls</userinput>
Makefile	article.xml	es_ES.po
<prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>svn add Makefile article.xml es_ES.po</userinput>
A         Makefile
A         article.xml
A         es_ES.po</screen>
	</step>

	<step>
	  <para>設定這些檔案的 <application>Subversion</application> <literal>svn:keywords</literal> 屬性到 <literal>FreeBSD=%H</literal>，讓提交時 <literal>$FreeBSD$</literal> 字串可以被展開成路徑、版本、日期和作者。</para>

	  <screen><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>svn propset svn:keywords FreeBSD=%H Makefile article.xml es_ES.po</userinput>
property 'svn:keywords' set on 'Makefile'
property 'svn:keywords' set on 'article.xml'
property 'svn:keywords' set on 'es_ES.po'</screen>
	</step>

	<step>
	  <para>設定檔案的<acronym>MIME</acronym> 類型。書籍和文章是 <literal>text/xml</literal> ，<acronym>PO</acronym> 檔是 <literal>text/x-gettext-translation</literal> 。</para>

	  <screen><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>svn propset svn:mime-type text/x-gettext-translation es_ES.po</userinput>
property 'svn:mime-type' set on 'es_ES.po'
<prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>svn propset svn:mime-type text/xml article.xml</userinput>
property 'svn:mime-type' set on 'article.xml'</screen>
	</step>

	<step>
	  <para>從 <filename>~/doc/</filename> 建立這些新檔案的 diff，讓檔名顯示完整的路徑。這可以幫助提交者辨識目標語系目錄。</para>

	  <screen><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>cd ~/doc</userinput>
<userinput>svn diff es_ES.ISO8859-1/articles/nanobsd/ &gt; /tmp/es_nanobsd.diff</userinput></screen>
	</step>
      </procedure>
    </example>

    <example xml:id="po-translations-submitting-korean-utf8">
      <title>Explaining-BSD 文章的韓文 <acronym>UTF-8</acronym> 翻譯</title>

      <procedure>
	<step>
	  <para>增加 FreeBSD 版本字串註解到 <acronym>PO</acronym> 檔的第一行：</para>

	  <programlisting>#$FreeBSD$</programlisting>
	</step>

	<step>
	  <para>增加 <filename>Makefile</filename> 、<acronym>PO</acronym> 檔和產生的 <acronym>XML</acronym> 翻譯到版本控制系統：</para>

	  <screen><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>cd ~/doc/ko_KR.UTF-8/articles/explaining-bsd/</userinput>
<prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>ls</userinput>
Makefile	article.xml	ko_KR.po
<prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>svn add Makefile article.xml ko_KR.po</userinput>
A         Makefile
A         article.xml
A         ko_KR.po</screen>
	</step>

	<step>
	  <para>設定這些檔案的 <application>Subversion</application> <literal>svn:keywords</literal> 屬性到 <literal>FreeBSD=%H</literal>，讓提交時 <literal>$FreeBSD$</literal> 字串可以被展開成路徑、版本、日期和作者。</para>

	  <screen><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>svn propset svn:keywords FreeBSD=%H Makefile article.xml ko_KR.po</userinput>
property 'svn:keywords' set on 'Makefile'
property 'svn:keywords' set on 'article.xml'
property 'svn:keywords' set on 'ko_KR.po'</screen>
	</step>

	<step>
	  <para>設定檔案的 <acronym>MIME</acronym> 類型。因為這些檔案使用 <acronym>UTF-8</acronym> 字元集，這也需要指定。為了防止版本控制系統將這些檔案誤認為二進位資料，<literal>fbsd:notbinary</literal>  屬性也需要設定。</para>

	  <screen><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>svn propset svn:mime-type 'text/x-gettext-translation；charset=UTF-8' ko_KR.po</userinput>
property 'svn:mime-type' set on 'ko_KR.po'
<prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>svn propset fbsd:notbinary yes ko_KR.po</userinput>
property 'fbsd:notbinary' set on 'ko_KR.po'
<prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>svn propset svn:mime-type 'text/xml；charset=UTF-8' article.xml</userinput>
property 'svn:mime-type' set on 'article.xml'
<prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>svn propset fbsd:notbinary yes article.xml</userinput>
property 'fbsd:notbinary' set on 'article.xml'</screen>
	</step>

	<step>
	  <para>從 <filename>~/doc/</filename> 建立這些新檔案的 diff。</para>

	  <screen><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>cd ~/doc</userinput>
<userinput>svn diff ko_KR.UTF-8/articles/explaining-bsd &gt; /tmp/ko-explaining.diff</userinput></screen>
	</step>
      </procedure>
    </example>
  </sect1>
</chapter>

  
<!-- Copyright (c) 1998 Nik Clayton, All rights reserved.

     Redistribution and use in source (SGML DocBook) and 'compiled' forms
     (SGML HTML, PDF, PostScript, RTF and so forth) with or without
     modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
     are met:

      1. Redistributions of source code (SGML DocBook) must retain the above
         copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
         disclaimer as the first lines of this file unmodified.

      2. Redistributions in compiled form (transformed to other DTDs,
         converted to PDF, PostScript, RTF and other formats) must reproduce
         the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
         following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
         provided with the distribution.

     THIS DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED BY NIK CLAYTON "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR
     IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
     OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
     DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL NIK CLAYTON BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
     INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
     (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
     SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
     HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
     STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
     ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
     POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

     $FreeBSD$
-->
<chapter version="5.0" xml:id="writing-style">
  <title>寫作風格</title>

  <sect1 xml:id="writing-style-tips">
    <title>叮嚀</title>

    <para xml:lang="en">Technical documentation can be improved by consistent use of
      several principles.  Most of these can be classified into three
      goals: <emphasis>be clear</emphasis>,
      <emphasis>be complete</emphasis>, and
      <emphasis>be concise</emphasis>.  These goals can conflict with
      each other.  Good writing consists of a balance between
      them.</para>

    <sect2 xml:id="writing-style-be-clear">
      <title xml:lang="en">Be Clear</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">Clarity is extremely important.  The reader may be a
	novice, or reading the document in a second language.  Strive
	for simple, uncomplicated text that clearly explains the
	concepts.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">Avoid flowery or embellished speech, jokes, or colloquial
	expressions.  Write as simply and clearly as possible.  Simple
	text is easier to understand and translate.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">Keep explanations as short, simple, and clear as possible.
	Avoid empty phrases like <quote>in order to</quote>, which
	usually just means <quote>to</quote>.  Avoid potentially
	patronizing words like <quote>basically</quote>.  Avoid Latin
	terms like <quote>i.e.</quote> or <quote>cf.</quote>, which
	may be unknown outside of academic or scientific
	groups.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">Write in a formal style.  Avoid addressing the reader
	as <quote>you</quote>.  For example, say
	<quote>copy the file to <filename>/tmp</filename></quote>
	rather than <quote>you can copy the file to
	  <filename>/tmp</filename></quote>.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">Give clear, correct, <emphasis>tested</emphasis> examples.
	A trivial example is better than no example.  A good example
	is better yet.  Do not give bad examples, identifiable by
	apologies or sentences like <quote>but really it should never
	  be done that way</quote>.  Bad examples are worse than no
	examples.  Give good examples, because <emphasis>even when
	  warned not to use the example as shown</emphasis>, the
	reader will usually just use the example as shown.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">Avoid <emphasis>weasel words</emphasis> like
	<quote>should</quote>, <quote>might</quote>,
	<quote>try</quote>, or <quote>could</quote>.  These words
	imply that the speaker is unsure of the facts, and
	create doubt in the reader.</para>

      <para xml:lang="en">Similarly, give instructions as imperative commands: not
	<quote>you should do this</quote>, but merely
	<quote>do this</quote>.</para>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="writing-style-be-complete">
      <title xml:lang="en">Be Complete</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">Do not make assumptions about the reader's abilities or
	skill level.  Tell them what they need to know.  Give links to
	other documents to provide background information without
	having to recreate it.  Put yourself in the reader's place,
	anticipate the questions they will ask, and answer
	them.</para>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="writing-style-be-concise">
      <title xml:lang="en">Be Concise</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">While features should be documented completely, sometimes
	there is so much information that the reader cannot easily
	find the specific detail needed.  The balance between being
	complete and being concise is a challenge.  One approach is to
	have an introduction, then a <quote>quick start</quote>
	section that describes the most common situation, followed by
	an in-depth reference section.</para>
    </sect2>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="writing-style-guidelines">
    <title xml:lang="en">Guidelines</title>

    <para xml:lang="en">To promote consistency between the myriad authors of the
      FreeBSD documentation, some guidelines have been drawn up for
      authors to follow.</para>

    <variablelist>
      <varlistentry>
	<term xml:lang="en">Use American English Spelling</term>

	<listitem>
	  <para xml:lang="en">There are several variants of English, with different
	    spellings for the same word.  Where spellings differ, use
	    the American English variant.  <quote>color</quote>, not
	    <quote>colour</quote>, <quote>rationalize</quote>, not
	    <quote>rationalise</quote>, and so on.</para>

	  <note>
	    <para xml:lang="en">The use of British English may be accepted in the
	      case of a contributed article, however the spelling must
	      be consistent within the whole document.  The other
	      documents such as books, web site, manual pages, etc.
	      will have to use American English.</para>
	  </note>
	</listitem>
      </varlistentry>

      <varlistentry>
	<term xml:lang="en">Do not use contractions</term>

	<listitem>
	  <para xml:lang="en">Do not use contractions.  Always spell the phrase out
	    in full.  <quote>Don't use contractions</quote> is
	    wrong.</para>

	  <para xml:lang="en">Avoiding contractions makes for a more formal tone, is
	    more precise, and is slightly easier for
	    translators.</para>
	</listitem>
      </varlistentry>

      <varlistentry>
	<term xml:lang="en">Use the serial comma</term>

	<listitem>
	  <para xml:lang="en">In a list of items within a paragraph, separate each
	    item from the others with a comma.  Separate the last item
	    from the others with a comma and the word
	    <quote>and</quote>.</para>

	  <para xml:lang="en">For example:</para>

	  <blockquote>
	    <para xml:lang="en">This is a list of one, two and three items.</para>
	  </blockquote>

	  <para xml:lang="en">Is this a list of three items, <quote>one</quote>,
	    <quote>two</quote>, and <quote>three</quote>, or a list of
	    two items, <quote>one</quote> and <quote>two and
	      three</quote>?</para>

	  <para xml:lang="en">It is better to be explicit and include a serial
	    comma:</para>

	  <blockquote>
	    <para xml:lang="en">This is a list of one, two, and three items.</para>
	  </blockquote>
	</listitem>
      </varlistentry>

      <varlistentry>
	<term xml:lang="en">Avoid redundant phrases</term>

	<listitem>
	  <para xml:lang="en">Do not use redundant phrases.  In particular,
	    <quote>the command</quote>, <quote>the file</quote>, and
	    <quote>man command</quote> are often redundant.</para>

	  <para xml:lang="en">For example, commands:</para>

	  <informalexample>
	    <para xml:lang="en">Wrong: Use the <command>svn</command> command to
	      update sources.</para>
	  </informalexample>

	  <informalexample>
	    <para xml:lang="en">Right:  Use <command>svn</command> to update
	      sources.</para>
	  </informalexample>

	  <para xml:lang="en">Filenames:</para>

	  <informalexample>
	    <para xml:lang="en">Wrong:  … in the filename
	      <filename>/etc/rc.local</filename>…</para>
	  </informalexample>

	  <informalexample>
	    <para xml:lang="en">Right:  … in
	      <filename>/etc/rc.local</filename>…</para>
	  </informalexample>

	  <para xml:lang="en">Manual page references (the second example uses
	    <tag>citerefentry</tag> with the
	    <literal>&amp;man.csh.1;</literal> entity):.</para>

	  <informalexample>
	    <para xml:lang="en">Wrong:  See <command>man csh</command> for more
	      information.</para>
	  </informalexample>

	  <informalexample>
	    <para xml:lang="en">Right:  See <citerefentry><refentrytitle>csh</refentrytitle><manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry>.</para>
	  </informalexample>
	</listitem>
      </varlistentry>

      <varlistentry>
	<term xml:lang="en">Two spaces between sentences</term>

	<listitem>
	  <para xml:lang="en">Always use two spaces between sentences, as it
	    improves readability and eases use of tools such as
	    <application>Emacs</application>.</para>

	  <para xml:lang="en">A period and spaces followed by a capital letter
	    does not always mark a new sentence, especially in names.
	    <quote>Jordan K. Hubbard</quote> is a good example.  It
	    has a capital <literal>H</literal> following a period and
	    a space, and is certainly not a new sentence.</para>
	</listitem>
      </varlistentry>
    </variablelist>

    <para xml:lang="en">For more information about writing style, see <link xlink:href="http://www.bartleby.com/141/">Elements of
	Style</link>, by William Strunk.</para>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="writing-style-guide">
    <title>風格指南</title>

    <para>由於文件是由眾多作者所維護，為了保持寫作風格的一貫性， 請遵守下列撰寫風格慣例。</para>

    <sect2>
      <title xml:lang="en">Letter Case</title>

      <para>Tag 的部份都是用小寫字母，譬如是用 <tag>para</tag> ，<emphasis>而非</emphasis><tag>PARA</tag>。</para>

      <para>而 SGML 內文則是用大寫字母表示，像是：  <literal>&lt;!ENTITY…&gt;</literal> 及 <literal>&lt;!DOCTYPE…&gt;</literal>， <emphasis>而不是</emphasis> <literal>&lt;!entity…&gt;</literal> 及 <literal>&lt;!doctype…&gt;</literal>。</para>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="writing-style-acronyms">
      <title xml:lang="en">Acronyms</title>

      <para>縮寫字(acronym)通常在書中第一次提到時，必須同時列出完整拼法， 比如：<quote>Network Time Protocol (<acronym>NTP</acronym>)</quote>。 定義縮寫字之後，應該儘量只使用該縮寫字(而非完整詞彙， 除非使用完整詞彙可以更能表達語意)來表達即可。 通常每本書只會第一次提到時，才會列出完整詞彙， 但若您高興也可以在每章第一次提到時又列出完整詞彙。</para>

      <para>所有縮寫要包在<tag>acronym</tag>標籤內。</para>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="writing-style-indentation">
      <title>縮排</title>

      <para><emphasis>無論</emphasis>檔案縮排設定為何， 每個檔案的第一行都不縮排。</para>

      <para>未完的標籤會以多兩個空白來增加縮排， 結尾的標籤則少兩個空白來縮減縮排。 若已達 8 個空白，則以 tab 取代之。 此外，在 tab 前面不要再用空白，也不要在每行後面加上空白。 每個 tag 的內文若超過一行的話，則接下來的就多兩個空白以做縮排。</para>

      <para>舉個例子，這節所用的寫法大致是下面這樣：</para>

      <programlisting><tag class="starttag">chapter</tag>
  <tag class="starttag">title</tag>...<tag class="endtag">title</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">sect1</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">title</tag>...<tag class="endtag">title</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">sect2</tag>
      <tag class="starttag">title</tag>Indentation<tag class="endtag">title</tag>

      <tag class="starttag">para</tag>The first line in each file starts with no indentation,
	<tag class="starttag">emphasis</tag>regardless<tag class="endtag">emphasis</tag> of the indentation level of
	the file which might contain the current file。<tag class="endtag">para</tag>

      ...
    <tag class="endtag">sect2</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">sect1</tag>
<tag class="endtag">chapter</tag></programlisting>

      <para xml:lang="en">Tags containing long attributes follow the same
	rules.  Following the indentation rules in this case helps
	editors and writers see which content is inside the
	tags:</para>

      <programlisting><tag class="starttag">para</tag>See the <tag class="starttag">link
    linkend="gmirror-troubleshooting"</tag>Troubleshooting<tag class="endtag">link</tag>
  section if there are problems booting.  Powering down and
  disconnecting the original <tag class="starttag">filename</tag>ada0<tag class="endtag">filename</tag> disk
  will allow it to be kept as an offline backup.<tag class="endtag">para</tag>

<tag class="starttag">para</tag>It is also possible to journal the boot disk of a &amp;os;
  system.  Refer to the article <tag class="starttag">link
    xlink:href="&amp;url.articles.gjournal-desktop;"</tag>Implementing UFS
    Journaling on a Desktop PC<tag class="endtag">link</tag> for detailed
  instructions.<tag class="endtag">para</tag></programlisting>

      <para xml:lang="en">When an element is too long to fit on the remainder of a
	line without wrapping, moving the start tag to the next line
	can make the source easier to read.  In this example, the
	<literal>systemitem</literal> element has been moved to the
	next line to avoid wrapping and indenting:</para>

      <programlisting><tag class="starttag">para</tag>With file flags, even
  <tag class="starttag">systemitem class="username"</tag>root<tag class="endtag">systemitem</tag> can be
  prevented from removing or altering files。<tag class="endtag">para</tag></programlisting>

      <para xml:lang="en">Configurations to help various text editors conform to
	these guidelines can be found in
	<xref linkend="editor-config"/>.</para>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="writing-style-tag-style">
      <title>標籤風格</title>

      <sect3 xml:id="writing-style-tag-style-spacing">
	<title>標籤空行</title>

	<para>同一縮排等級的標籤要以空一行來做區隔，而不同縮排等級的則不必。 比如：</para>

	<informalexample>
	  <programlisting><tag class="starttag">article lang='en'</tag>
  <tag class="starttag">articleinfo</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">title</tag>NIS<tag class="endtag">title</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">pubdate</tag>October 1999<tag class="endtag">pubdate</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">abstract</tag>
      <tag class="starttag">para</tag>...
	...
	...<tag class="endtag">para</tag>
    <tag class="endtag">abstract</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">articleinfo</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">sect1</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">title</tag>...<tag class="endtag">title</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">para</tag>...<tag class="endtag">para</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">sect1</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">sect1</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">title</tag>...<tag class="endtag">title</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">para</tag>...<tag class="endtag">para</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">sect1</tag>
<tag class="endtag">article</tag></programlisting>
	</informalexample>
      </sect3>

      <sect3 xml:id="writing-style-tag-style-separating">
	<title>標籤的分行</title>

	<para>像是 <tag>itemizedlist</tag> 這類的標籤事實上本身不含任何文字資料，必須得由其他標籤來補充內文。 這類的標籤會獨用一整行。</para>

	<para>另外，像是 <tag>para</tag> 及 <tag>term</tag> 這類的標籤並不需搭配其他標籤， 就可附上文字資料，並且在標籤後面的<emphasis>同一行</emphasis>內即可立即寫上這些內文。</para>

	<para>當然，這兩類的標籤結尾時也是跟上面道理相同。</para>

	<para>不過，當上述這兩種標籤混用時，會有很明顯的困擾。</para>

	<para>當第一類標籤的後面接上第二類標籤的話， 那麼要把這兩類標籤各自分行來寫。 後者標籤的段落， 也是需要做適當縮排調整。</para>

	<para>而第二類標籤結尾時，可以與第一類標籤的結尾放在同一行。</para>
      </sect3>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="writing-style-whitespace-changes">
      <title>空白的更改</title>

      <para><emphasis>在提交修改時，請別在修改內容的同時， 也一起更改編排格式。</emphasis>。</para>

      <para>如此一來，像是 Handbook 翻譯團隊才能迅速找出你改了哪些內容， 而不用費心思去判斷該行的改變，是由於格式重排或者內容異動。</para>

      <para>舉例說明，若要在某段加上兩個句子，如此一來該段落的某行勢必會超出 80 縱列，這時請先 commmit 修改。 接著，再修飾過長行落的換行，然後再次 commit 之。 而第二次的 commit 紀錄，請明確說明這只是 whitespace-only (修改空白而已) 的更改，如此一來，翻譯團隊就可以忽略第二次 commit 了 。</para>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="writing-style-nonbreaking-space">
      <title>Nonbreaking space</title>

      <para>請避免一些情況下的斷行：造成版面醜醜的、或是須連貫表達的同一句子。 斷行的情況會隨所閱讀的工具不同而有所不同。 尤其是透過純文字瀏覽器來看 HTML 時會更明顯看到類似下面這樣不好的編排段落：</para>

      <literallayout class="monospaced">Data capacity ranges from 40 MB to 15
GB。 Hardware compression …</literallayout>

      <para>請使用 <literal>&amp;nbsp;</literal> 以避免同句子之間的斷行， 以下示範如何使用 nonbreaking spaces：</para>

      <itemizedlist>
	<listitem>
	  <para>在數字與單位之間：</para>
	  <programlisting>57600&amp;nbsp;bps</programlisting>
	</listitem>

	<listitem>
	  <para>在程式名稱與版號之間：</para>
	  <programlisting>&amp;os;&amp;nbsp;9.2</programlisting>
	</listitem>

	<listitem>
	  <para>multiword 之間 (使用時請小心，像是 <quote>The FreeBSD Brazilian Portuguese Documentation Project</quote> 這類由三到四個字所組成的， 則不用加。)：</para>
	  <programlisting>Sun&amp;nbsp;Microsystems</programlisting>
	</listitem>
      </itemizedlist>
    </sect2>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="writing-style-word-list">
    <title>詞彙表</title>

    <para>以下詞彙表列出使用在 FreeBSD 文件的正確拼法和大小寫。 若找不到要找的詞彙，請詢問 <link xlink:href="http://lists.FreeBSD.org/mailman/listinfo/freebsd-doc">FreeBSD documentation project mailing list</link> 。</para>

    <informaltable frame="none" pgwide="0">
      <tgroup cols="3">
	<thead>
	  <row>
	    <entry>Word</entry>
	    <entry>XML Code</entry>
	    <entry>Notes</entry>
	  </row>
	</thead>

	<tbody>
	  <row>
	    <entry>CD-ROM</entry>

	    <entry><tag class="starttag">acronym</tag><literal>CD-ROM</literal><tag class="endtag">acronym</tag></entry>
	  </row>

	  <row>
	    <entry>DoS (Denial of Service)</entry>
	    <entry><tag class="starttag">acronym</tag><literal>DoS</literal><tag class="endtag">acronym</tag></entry>
	  </row>

	  <row>
	    <entry>email</entry>
	  </row>

	  <row>
	    <entry>file system</entry>
	  </row>

	  <row>
	    <entry>IPsec</entry>
	  </row>

	  <row>
	    <entry>Internet</entry>
	  </row>

	  <row>
	    <entry>manual page</entry>
	  </row>

	  <row>
	    <entry>mail server</entry>
	  </row>

	  <row>
	    <entry>name server</entry>
	  </row>

	  <row>
	    <entry>Ports Collection</entry>
	  </row>

	  <row>
	    <entry>read-only</entry>
	  </row>

	  <row>
	    <entry>Soft Updates</entry>
	  </row>

	  <row>
	    <entry>stdin</entry>
	    <entry><tag class="starttag">varname</tag>stdin<tag class="endtag">varname</tag></entry>
	  </row>

	  <row>
	    <entry>stdout</entry>
	    <entry><tag class="starttag">varname</tag>stdout<tag class="endtag">varname</tag></entry>
	  </row>

	  <row>
	    <entry>stderr</entry>
	    <entry><tag class="starttag">varname</tag>stderr<tag class="endtag">varname</tag></entry>
	  </row>

	  <row>
	    <entry>Subversion</entry>

	    <entry><tag class="starttag">application</tag><literal>Subversion</literal><tag class="endtag">application</tag></entry>
	    <entry>不要用大寫<literal>SVN</literal>來表示 Subversion應用程式。以<tag class="starttag">command</tag><literal>svn</literal><tag class="endtag">command</tag>來表示指令。</entry>
	  </row>

	  <row>
	    <entry xml:lang="en"><trademark class="registered">UNIX</trademark></entry>
	    <entry xml:lang="en"><literal>&amp;unix;</literal></entry>
	  </row>

	  <row>
	    <entry>userland</entry>
	    <entry/>
	    <entry xml:lang="en">things that apply to user space, not the
	      kernel</entry>
	  </row>

	  <row>
	    <entry>web server</entry>
	  </row>
	</tbody>
      </tgroup>
    </informaltable>
  </sect1>
</chapter>

  
<!-- Copyright (c) 2013 Warren Block
    All rights reserved.

    Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
    modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
    are met:
    1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
    2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above
    copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
    disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
    with the distribution.

    THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHORS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
    IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
    LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
    FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
    AUTHORS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
    INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
    (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
    SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
    HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
    CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
    OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
    EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

    $FreeBSD$
-->
<chapter version="5.0" xml:id="editor-config">

  <title xml:lang="en">Editor Configuration</title>

  <para xml:lang="en">Adjusting text editor configuration can make working on
    document files quicker and easier, and help documents conform to
    <acronym>FDP</acronym> guidelines.</para>

  <sect1 xml:id="editor-config-vim">
    <title xml:lang="en"><application>Vim</application></title>

    <para xml:lang="en">Install from <package>editors/vim</package>
      or <package>editors/vim-lite</package>.</para>

    <sect2 xml:id="editor-config-vim-config">
      <title xml:lang="en">Configuration</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">Edit <filename>~/.vimrc</filename>, adding these
	lines:</para>

      <programlisting xml:lang="en">if has("autocmd")
    au BufNewFile,BufRead *.sgml,*.ent,*.xsl,*.xml call Set_SGML()
    au BufNewFile,BufRead *.[1-9] call ShowSpecial()
endif " has(autocmd)

function Set_Highlights()
    "match ExtraWhitespace /^\s* \s*\|\s\+$/
    highlight default link OverLength ErrorMsg
    match OverLength /\%71v.\+/
    return 0
endfunction

function ShowSpecial()
    setlocal list listchars=tab:&gt;&gt;,trail:*,eol:$
    hi def link nontext ErrorMsg
    return 0
endfunction " ShowSpecial()

function Set_SGML()
    setlocal number
    syn match sgmlSpecial "&amp;[^;]*;"
    setlocal syntax=sgml
    setlocal filetype=xml
    setlocal shiftwidth=2
    setlocal textwidth=70
    setlocal tabstop=8
    setlocal softtabstop=2
    setlocal formatprg="fmt -p"
    setlocal autoindent
    setlocal smartindent
    " Rewrap paragraphs
    noremap P gqj
    " Replace spaces with tabs
    noremap T :s/        /\t/&lt;CR&gt;
    call ShowSpecial()
    call Set_Highlights()
    return 0
endfunction " Set_SGML()</programlisting>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="editor-config-vim-use">
      <title xml:lang="en">Use</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">Press <keycap>P</keycap> to reformat paragraphs or text that has been selected in Visual mode.  Press
	<keycap>T</keycap> to replace groups of eight spaces with a
	tab.</para>
    </sect2>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="editor-config-emacs">
    <title xml:lang="en"><application>Emacs</application></title>

    <para xml:lang="en">Install from
      <package>editors/emacs</package>
      or <package>editors/xemacs</package>.</para>

    <para xml:lang="en">Edit <filename>~/.emacs</filename>, adding this
      line:</para>

    <programlisting xml:lang="en">(add-hook 'nxml-mode-hook 'turn-on-auto-fill)</programlisting>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="editor-config-nano">
    <title xml:lang="en"><application>nano</application></title>

    <para xml:lang="en">Install from
      <package>editors/nano</package> or
      <package>editors/nano-devel</package>.</para>

    <sect2 xml:id="editor-config-nano-config">
      <title xml:lang="en">Configuration</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">Copy the sample <acronym>XML</acronym> syntax highlight
	file to the user's home directory:</para>

      <screen xml:lang="en"><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>cp /usr/local/share/nano/xml.nanorc ~/.nanorc</userinput></screen>

      <para xml:lang="en">Add these lines to the new
	<filename>~/.nanorc</filename>.</para>

      <programlisting xml:lang="en">syntax "xml" "\.([jrs]html?|xml|xslt?)$"
# trailing whitespace
color ,blue "[[:space:]]+$"
# multiples of eight spaces at the start a line
# (after zero or more tabs) should be a tab
color ,blue "^([TAB]*[ ]{8})+"
# tabs after spaces
color ,yellow "( )+TAB"
# highlight indents that have an odd number of spaces
color ,red "^(([ ]{2})+|(TAB+))*[ ]{1}[^ ]{1}"
# lines longer than 70 characters
color ,yellow "^(.{71})|(TAB.{63})|(TAB{2}.{55})|(TAB{3}.{47}).+$"</programlisting>

      <para xml:lang="en">Process the file to create embedded tabs:</para>

      <screen xml:lang="en"><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>perl -i'' -pe 's/TAB/\t/g' ~/.nanorc</userinput></screen>
    </sect2>

    <sect2 xml:id="editor-config-nano-use">
      <title xml:lang="en">Use</title>

      <para xml:lang="en">Specify additional helpful options when running the
	editor:</para>

      <screen xml:lang="en"><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>nano -AKipwz -r 70 -T8 <replaceable>chapter.xml</replaceable></userinput></screen>

      <para xml:lang="en">Users of <citerefentry><refentrytitle>csh</refentrytitle><manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry> can define an alias in
	<filename>~/.cshrc</filename> to automate these
	options:</para>

      <programlisting xml:lang="en">alias nano "nano -AKipwz -r 70 -T8"</programlisting>

      <para xml:lang="en">After the alias is defined, the options will be added
	automatically:</para>

      <screen xml:lang="en"><prompt>%</prompt> <userinput>nano <replaceable>chapter.xml</replaceable></userinput></screen>
    </sect2>
  </sect1>
</chapter>

  
<!-- Copyright (c) 1998, 1999 Nik Clayton, All rights reserved.

     Redistribution and use in source (SGML DocBook) and 'compiled' forms
     (SGML HTML, PDF, PostScript, RTF and so forth) with or without
     modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
     are met:

      1. Redistributions of source code (SGML DocBook) must retain the above
         copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
         disclaimer as the first lines of this file unmodified.

      2. Redistributions in compiled form (transformed to other DTDs,
         converted to PDF, PostScript, RTF and other formats) must reproduce
         the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
         following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
         provided with the distribution.

     THIS DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED BY NIK CLAYTON "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR
     IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
     OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
     DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL NIK CLAYTON BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
     INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
     (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
     SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
     HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
     STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
     ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
     POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

     $FreeBSD$
-->
<chapter version="5.0" xml:id="see-also">
  <title xml:lang="en">See Also</title>

  <para xml:lang="en">This document is deliberately not an exhaustive discussion of
    XML, the DTDs listed, and the FreeBSD Documentation Project.  For
    more information about these, you are encouraged to see the
    following web sites.</para>

  <sect1 xml:id="see-also-fdp">
    <title>FreeBSD 文件計劃</title>

    <itemizedlist>
      <listitem>
	<para><link xlink:href="@@URL_RELPREFIX@@/docproj/index.html">FreeBSD 文件計劃網頁</link></para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
	<para><link xlink:href="@@URL_RELPREFIX@@/doc/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/index.html">FreeBSD 使用手冊</link></para>
      </listitem>
    </itemizedlist>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="see-also-xml">
    <title>XML</title>

    <itemizedlist>
      <listitem>
	<para><link xlink:href="http://www.w3.org/XML/">W3C's XML 網頁 SGML/XML 網頁</link></para>
      </listitem>
    </itemizedlist>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="see-also-html">
    <title>HTML</title>

    <itemizedlist>
      <listitem>
	<para><link xlink:href="http://www.w3.org/">全球資訊網協會</link></para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
	<para><link xlink:href="http://www.w3.org/TR/REC-html40/">The HTML 4.0 規格表</link></para>
      </listitem>
    </itemizedlist>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="see-also-docbook">
    <title>DocBook</title>

    <itemizedlist>
      <listitem>
	<para><link xlink:href="http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/">The DocBook 技術委員會</link>， DocBook DTD的維護者</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
	<para><link xlink:href="http://www.docbook.org/">DocBook：The Definitive Guide</link>， DocBook DTD的線上文件。</para>
      </listitem>

      <listitem>
	<para xml:lang="en"><link xlink:href="http://docbook.sourceforge.net/">The DocBook
	    Open Repository</link> contains DSSSL stylesheets and
	  other resources for people using DocBook</para>
      </listitem>
    </itemizedlist>
  </sect1>

</chapter>


  
<!-- Copyright (c) 2000 Nik Clayton, All rights reserved.

     Redistribution and use in source (SGML DocBook) and 'compiled' forms
     (SGML HTML, PDF, PostScript, RTF and so forth) with or without
     modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
     are met:

      1. Redistributions of source code (SGML DocBook) must retain the above
         copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
         disclaimer as the first lines of this file unmodified.

      2. Redistributions in compiled form (transformed to other DTDs,
         converted to PDF, PostScript, RTF and other formats) must reproduce
         the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
         following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
         provided with the distribution.

     THIS DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED BY NIK CLAYTON "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR
     IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
     OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
     DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL NIK CLAYTON BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
     INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
     (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
     SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
     HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
     STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
     ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
     POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

     $FreeBSD$
-->
<appendix version="5.0" xml:id="examples">

  <title>舉例</title>

  <para xml:lang="en">These examples are not exhaustive—they do not contain
    all the elements that might be desirable to use, particularly in a
    document's front matter.  For more examples of DocBook markup,
    examine the <acronym>XML</acronym> source for this and other
    documents available in the <application>Subversion</application>
    <literal>doc</literal> repository, or available online starting at
    <uri xlink:href="http://svnweb.FreeBSD.org/doc/">http://svnweb.FreeBSD.org/doc/</uri>.</para>

  <sect1 xml:id="examples-docbook-book">
    <title>DocBook <tag>book</tag></title>

    <example>
      <title>DocBook <tag>book</tag></title>

      <programlisting>&lt;!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//FreeBSD//DTD DocBook XML V5.0-Based Extension//EN"
	"http://www.FreeBSD.org/XML/share/xml/freebsd50.dtd"&gt;

<tag class="starttag">book xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
  xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" version="5.0"
  xml:lang="en"</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">info</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">title</tag>An Example Book<tag class="endtag">title</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">author</tag>
      <tag class="starttag">personname</tag>
        <tag class="starttag">firstname</tag>Your first name<tag class="endtag">firstname</tag>
        <tag class="starttag">surname</tag>Your surname<tag class="endtag">surname</tag>
      <tag class="endtag">personname</tag>

      <tag class="starttag">affiliation</tag>
	<tag class="starttag">address</tag>
	  <tag class="starttag">email</tag>foo@example.com<tag class="endtag">email</tag>
	<tag class="endtag">address</tag>
      <tag class="endtag">affiliation</tag>
    <tag class="endtag">author</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">copyright</tag>
      <tag class="starttag">year</tag>2000<tag class="endtag">year</tag>
      <tag class="starttag">holder</tag>Copyright string here<tag class="endtag">holder</tag>
    <tag class="endtag">copyright</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">abstract</tag>
      <tag class="starttag">para</tag>If your book has an abstract then it should go here。<tag class="endtag">para</tag>
    <tag class="endtag">abstract</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">info</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">preface</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">title</tag>Preface<tag class="endtag">title</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">para</tag>Your book may have a preface, in which case it should be placed
      here。<tag class="endtag">para</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">preface</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">chapter</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">title</tag>My First Chapter<tag class="endtag">title</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">para</tag>This is the first chapter in my book。<tag class="endtag">para</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">sect1</tag>
      <tag class="starttag">title</tag>My First Section<tag class="endtag">title</tag>

      <tag class="starttag">para</tag>This is the first section in my book。<tag class="endtag">para</tag>
    <tag class="endtag">sect1</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">chapter</tag>
<tag class="endtag">book</tag></programlisting>
    </example>
  </sect1>

  <sect1 xml:id="examples-docbook-article">
    <title>DocBook <tag>article</tag></title>

    <example>
      <title>DocBook <tag>article</tag></title>

      <programlisting>&lt;!DOCTYPE article PUBLIC "-//FreeBSD//DTD DocBook XML V5.0-Based Extension//EN"
	"http://www.FreeBSD.org/XML/share/xml/freebsd50.dtd"&gt;

<tag class="starttag">article xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
  xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" version="5.0"
  xml:lang="en"</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">info</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">title</tag>An Example Article<tag class="endtag">title</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">author</tag>
      <tag class="starttag">personname</tag>
        <tag class="starttag">firstname</tag>Your first name<tag class="endtag">firstname</tag>
        <tag class="starttag">surname</tag>Your surname<tag class="endtag">surname</tag>
      <tag class="endtag">personname</tag>

      <tag class="starttag">affiliation</tag>
	<tag class="starttag">address</tag>
	  <tag class="starttag">email</tag>foo@example.com<tag class="endtag">email</tag>
	<tag class="endtag">address</tag>
      <tag class="endtag">affiliation</tag>
    <tag class="endtag">author</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">copyright</tag>
      <tag class="starttag">year</tag>2000<tag class="endtag">year</tag>
      <tag class="starttag">holder</tag>Copyright string here<tag class="endtag">holder</tag>
    <tag class="endtag">copyright</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">abstract</tag>
      <tag class="starttag">para</tag>If your article has an abstract then it should go here。<tag class="endtag">para</tag>
    <tag class="endtag">abstract</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">info</tag>

  <tag class="starttag">sect1</tag>
    <tag class="starttag">title</tag>My First Section<tag class="endtag">title</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">para</tag>This is the first section in my article。<tag class="endtag">para</tag>

    <tag class="starttag">sect2</tag>
      <tag class="starttag">title</tag>My First Sub-Section<tag class="endtag">title</tag>

      <tag class="starttag">para</tag>This is the first sub-section in my article。<tag class="endtag">para</tag>
    <tag class="endtag">sect2</tag>
  <tag class="endtag">sect1</tag>
<tag class="endtag">article</tag></programlisting>
    </example>
  </sect1>
</appendix>


  <index/>
</book>